JP2023048223A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can be controlled to be in a normal game state and a time-saving game state. A first result suggestion performance suggesting that the result is advantageous to a player in an ordinary symbol variation performance is executed when a winning determination of an ordinary symbol is determined to be a first determination result different from a losing result in the time-saving game state, whereas a second result suggestion performance suggesting that the result is disadvantageous to the player in the ordinary symbol variation performance is executed when the winning determination of the ordinary symbol is determined to be a second determination result different from the first determination result in the time-saving game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 56

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on establishment of a starting condition.

Among such gaming machines, there are those that control the game to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2018-057968 A

However, the gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, first determination means for determining determination information acquired based on establishment of a first acquisition condition; 2. second determination means for determining determination information acquired based on establishment of an acquisition condition; state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state; Effect control means capable of executing a first game effect according to the determination result of the first determination means and a second game effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the effect control means When the second determination means determines that the first determination result is different from the losing result during the second game state, the first result suggesting effect is executed in the second game effect, while the second game state is executed. When the second determining means determines that the second determination result is different from the first determination result, a second result suggesting effect different from the first result suggesting effect is executed in the second game effect. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various storage areas of a main RAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the game flow of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the gate detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific area|region detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation|variation pattern determination table for time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of a special figure prior determination table. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special design stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a special winning opening control data determination table. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a small winning game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state setting table. It is a diagram showing a game state to be referred to at the end of the big winning game not via the small winning game. It is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of the big winning game via the small winning game. It is a figure which shows the normal figure normal electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the various determination tables used by normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a normal figure advance determination table. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting control process in a main control board. It is a timing chart when a time-saving game state occurs after the end of a jackpot game. It is a timing chart when the time saving special figure remaining number becomes 0 and the time saving game state ends. It is a timing chart when a big winning game is started from a small winning game and a time saving game state ends. It is a timing chart when the time saving normal figure remaining number becomes 0 and the time saving game state ends. It is a figure which shows the main process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of a production|presentation control part. It is a mode flow showing the transition of the game mode. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the light emission production|presentation determination process at the time of winning of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows the look-ahead continuous production determination processing of the production control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table; It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table for normal. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination table for time reduction. It is a figure which shows the notice production|presentation determination processing in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a variable start accessory announcement determination table; It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice determination table before a reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a dialog announcement pattern determination table; It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a development effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a decided effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the 3rd time reduction system production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the customer waiting state during the normal game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example when the look-ahead effect is executed during the normal game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example when the look-ahead effect ends halfway during the normal game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case variable production|presentation is performed after moving to a 1st time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of production|presentation in case a variable production|presentation is performed after shifting to a 1st time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of production|presentation after the result advantageous to a player was notified by normal pattern fluctuation|variation production|presentation during a time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production|presentation after the result advantageous to a player was notified by normal figure fluctuation|variation production|presentation during a time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example 2 of production|presentation after the result advantageous to a player was notified by normal pattern fluctuation|variation production|presentation during a time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation that a result display is performed when a time saving game state is complete|finished. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which a result display is not performed when a time saving game state is complete|finished. It is a figure which shows the various tables in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in which the battle mode production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment is performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of production|presentation in which the battle mode production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment is performed.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls (game media) flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 made up of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95 (to be described later) are dispensed based on the fulfillment of the granting conditions. an upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper plate 11 and flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later; A shooting operation device 13 is provided which can be operated to shoot the ball.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and produce sound (music, voice) effects by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like. It's like A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 is also provided with a notification LED 10a which is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality occurs such that game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (Fig. 1 or 2) function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a normal state and a normal state of the production button 17. Effect button driving device 17b equipped with a button driving motor for changing to a projecting state located above and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner, A performance button light emission LED 17c is provided for changing the performance button 17 between a light-off state and a lighting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner, so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.例文帳に追加

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 4) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the ball lending machine (not shown) installed side by side with the game machine 1 subtracts the remaining money stored in the storage medium and lends the game balls. When the return button 20b of the rental operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 4) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path, and the fullness of the lower tray 12 is detected by the full detection switch 32a. During this time, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 4) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 4) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 are provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 (see FIG. 4) for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3 and A lock mechanism (not shown) for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 4) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The shooting device 26 includes a shooting member for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 4) for driving the shooting member, and a shooting device that tilts upward from the shooting member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping a game ball are provided at a launch position that is the inclined lower end of the launch rail. When the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 4) is received at the shooting position, the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a by the operation of the hitting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of the game ball into the inside. The left game area is divided into a left game area where the shot game balls flow down and a right game area where the game balls shot with a second projectile force stronger than the first projectile flow. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the decorative frame 40 , and the warp device 41 moves the interior of the decorative frame 40 below the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow downward.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win a prize (enter a ball) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, a game One general winning hole 43 in which a ball can always win a prize (enter a ball) is provided. When a game ball that has won (entered) this general winning hole 43 is detected by a general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 4) (granting conditions are satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls A payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) pays out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (given prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first starting port 45 (first special symbol starting winning region) in which the game ball can always win (entering the ball). When the played game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 4) (granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). It is designed to be paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (given prize value). In addition, a right for performing a jackpot determination whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

Directly below the first starting port 45, a starting port lamp 75 is provided that emits light in a predetermined manner when a lamp lighting effect described later is executed, and a lens member 75a covers the front of the starting port lamp 75. (object) is provided.

Below the decorative frame 40 and obliquely below the first starting port 45, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a win is won in the hit determination described later). A variable starter 46 is provided which can be converted from a difficult closed state to an easy open state or a game ball winning state.

The variable starting part 46 has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to serve as a flow path for game balls, and a second starting opening opening and closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction. A second starting opening 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the starting opening opening/closing member 48, and a second opening that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting opening 47 By moving the start opening detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) and the second start opening opening/closing member 48 forward (the prize winning regulation position), the second start opening 47 is closed and the second start opening is closed. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 4) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 to the open state by moving the opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning position).

Then, the game ball enters the second starting port 47 that is open during the auxiliary game described later, and the game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) (granting conditions are met). ), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (given prize value). In addition, a right for performing a jackpot determination whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

The right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40 has an upstream flow path 91a into which all the game balls shot toward the right game area flow, and almost all of the game balls flowed out from the upstream flow path 91a. A central flow path 91b, a left flow path 91c into which game balls bounced to the left without flowing into the central flow path 91b, and a right side into which game balls bounced to the right without flowing into the central flow path 91b Flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e into which almost all of the game balls flowing out from the central flow path 91b and the game balls flowing out from the right flow path 91d flow in, and the left side without flowing into the first downstream flow path 91e A second downstream channel 91f is provided into which the game ball that has bounced and the game ball that has flowed out from the left channel 91c flows.

At the upstream end of the central flow path 91b, a normal pattern gate 44 (normal pattern starting area) through which game balls can always pass is provided. Then, the prize ball is not granted, but the right to perform the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) of whether or not to execute the winning game is granted (normal pattern determination information described later is stored).

In the middle of the central flow path 91b, there is a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit in the jackpot determination). A first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted to a state is provided.

The first variable winning portion 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to serve as a flow path for game balls (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b is ), a first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a first big winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (entered) the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position) For converting the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning position) to convert the first big winning opening 50 to the open state. A first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 4) is provided.

When the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward during a small winning game described later and the first large winning opening opening/closing member 50 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 is opened. The game ball flowing down on the upper surface or the game ball reaching the first big winning hole 50 enters the first big winning hole 50, and the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, downstream of the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, the upper surface slopes down in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls, and a specific area opening and closing that can move in the front-back direction. A member 52, a specific region 53 that opens upward directly below the specific region opening/closing member 52, a specific region detection switch 53a (see FIG. 4) that detects a game ball that has flowed (entered) into the specific region 53, By moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 forward (winning control position), the specific area 53 is converted to the closed state, and by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 backward (winning position), the A channel switching solenoid 52b for converting the region 53 to an open state and a discharge port 54 into which game balls that have not flowed into the specific region 53 flow are provided.

Then, when a game ball passes through (enters) a specific area 53 that is in an open state during a small winning game to be described later, and this game ball is detected by a specific area detection switch 53a, prize balls are not awarded. After the end of the small winning game, a big winning game, which will be described later, is executed.

In addition, without providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large winning opening detection switch 50a is used as the specific area, and the first large winning opening detection switch 50a that is in the open state during the small winning game described later is used. A game ball that has flowed into the winning hole may be detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, so that a big winning game, which will be described later, may be executed after the small winning game ends.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the big winning game and the small winning game that converts the big winning opening to the open state are treated as special games advantageous to the player, but when the big winning game is treated as a special game and the small winning game is treated as a specific game There is

In the middle of the first downstream flow path 91e, it is possible or easy to win a prize (enter a prize) from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit in the judgment of a big hit). A second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted to an open state is provided.

The second variable winning portion 55 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in the drawing), thereby forming a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). ), a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a second large winning opening opening/closing member 56 that opens upward directly below the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 (winning area). Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved forward (winning regulation position). As a result, the second large winning opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 is moved toward the rear (winning position) to convert the second large winning opening 56 to the open state. A second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 4) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 56 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 flows down. A game ball that has been playing or a game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 56 enters the second big winning hole 56, and when this game ball is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of games are played. Game balls (for example, 10) are paid out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls from a payout device 95 (see FIG. 3).

In addition, the front of the right game area is covered with a decorative member 91 that allows the rear to be seen through. A plurality of front protrusions 91b2 protruding rearward are provided at intervals at a position directly above the member 51 . Furthermore, a plurality of rear projections 91b1 are provided on the back wall of the central flow path 91b (immediately above the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51) so as to alternate with the front projections 91b2. and the front protrusion 91b2 form a meandering flow path, thereby attenuating the flow-down velocity (flow-down force) of the game ball in the central flow path 91b (especially the upper surface of the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51). there is Therefore, it takes one second to flow down from the upstream end to the downstream end on the upper surface of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 .

Furthermore, a plurality of rear projections 91c2 projecting rearward are spaced apart from the rear surface of the decorative member 91 and at a position in front of the first downstream flow path 91e (directly above the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57). are provided with a space between them. Furthermore, a plurality of rear projections 91c1 are provided on the back wall of the first downstream flow path 91e (immediately above the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) so as to alternate with the front projections 91c2. A meandering flow path is formed by the portion 91c1 and the front projecting portion 91c2, thereby attenuating the flow speed (flowing force) of the game ball in the first downstream flow path 91e (especially the upper surface of the second prize winning opening opening/closing member 57). It's like Therefore, it takes one second to flow down from the upstream end to the downstream end on the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 .

The game ball shot into the left game area either flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage section 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. Winning any of the three general prize winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or flowing into the out opening 39. Therefore, the normal figure gate 44 provided in the right game area, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning part 49 (first big winning part 50) and the second variable winning part 55 (second big winning part 56) winning ( pass).

In addition, the game ball shot to the right game area passes through the upstream flow path 91a, the central flow path 91b (general map gate 44), the left flow path 91c, the right flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, the 2 downstream flow path 91f etc., one general winning opening 43 provided in the right game area, variable starting part 46 (second starting opening 47), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50), Either the second variable winning portion 55 (the second big winning port 56 ) is won, or the player enters the out port 39 . Therefore, there is no chance of winning the general prize winning opening 43 and the first start opening 45 provided in the left game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 56, and the out opening 39 An out-ball flow path is provided for receiving and gathering out-balls made up of inflowing game balls to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 4) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out ball detection switch 39a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. FIG.

Outside the game area 5a, there are a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61 and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63 and a second special symbol reservation device. A holding display device consisting of a display 64 and a normal symbol holding display 65, a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right hitting display 67 and a state confirmation display 68 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , The second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47 (entering the ball). The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol hit determination performed based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44 .

The jackpot determination is the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute a big hit game or a small hit game based on the obtained special figure determination information.

Then, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display device 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is reported after the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop display of the first special symbol is performed. In addition, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and the determination result is notified after the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big win mode, small win mode, losing mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means a state in which execution of a jackpot game (special game) is determined in the jackpot determination. The "jackpot game" is a round game in which the big winning holes (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) are changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined number of times ( For example, 4 times, 10 times, etc.), it means a game state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win prize balls.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the big winning hole, one round game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage for the player.

Also, "small hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute a small hit game (special game) in the big hit determination. The "small winning game" means that a player who plays a game in which the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) is changed from the closed state to the open state in a more disadvantageous manner than the big winning game can easily win prize balls. A game state that is advantageous to the player.

The maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small winning game is a predetermined time, but even before the maximum opening time is reached, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening. When (for example, 10) wins (enters a ball), the small hit game ends. In addition, unlike the big winning game, the game state does not change only by executing the small winning game.

Auxiliary game determination is based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 (entrance ball), normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained general pattern determination information. It should be noted that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display device 62 performs normal symbol fluctuation display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) for notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination.

It should be noted that the term "hit" in the present embodiment refers to a state in which it is determined that an auxiliary game (hitting game) is to be executed in the auxiliary game determination. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and maximum opening time, the second starting port 47 When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) win a prize (entering a ball), the auxiliary game (hitting game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbols are likely to be established. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (hitting games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided.

The first special symbol reservation display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45. It is for displaying the first reserved memory (U1), and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of the first reserved items. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying the second reserved memory (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. It should be noted that although up to four second reserve memories are stored, the number may be less or more than four, and the second reserve may not be stored.

The normal pattern reservation display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of normal pattern determination information (normal pattern reservation) stored when the game ball wins (passes) in the normal pattern gate 44. It lights up or blinks in a manner that indicates the number of normal map reservations. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of normal pattern reservations is stored up to 4, it may be less than or greater than 4, and the normal pattern reservations may not be stored.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if the big hit is determined to be a big hit, numbers such as "3" and "7" are displayed stopped, and if it is determined to be a small hit, alphabets such as "A" and "C" are displayed. It is preferable to stop display, and when it is determined that the result is a failure, to stop display "-", and to repeat extinguishing and "-" during variable display.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big win state (special game) occurs, and the LEDs are turned on in a predetermined manner to indicate the number of rounds at the start of the big win game. Lighting is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that prompts the user to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called righthanded) during a big win state (special game) or a time-saving game state. The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. is turned on, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. Thus, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (surface) of the game machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether there is The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 may be the front (surface) of the game machine 1, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. may be recognizably displayed. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed. and vice versa.

Also, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the second special symbol reservation display device 64, the round number display device 66, right-handed indicators 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be illuminated.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided in the lower part of the effect space 40a. In front of the device 70, a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display formed smaller in size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided. , a movable effect device 73 for executing an action effect is provided, and a variation notification LED 59 for notifying the variable display state of the special symbol is provided in the right part of the effect space 40a.

In the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, various effects are displayed according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect performed while the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbols 70a performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, and the execution of the jackpot game. There are jackpot performances that are held inside.

In addition, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal moving device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, a motor, etc., while the first image display device 70 is executing a variable effect. It has become.

Specifically, between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a rendering position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70, the vertical direction is changed. It is designed to perform a movement effect by moving (rising, descending) to. The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or may be configured such that the movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 17 .

In the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a variable display area for displaying three production patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and execution of variable production A mode display area or the like indicating the production mode related to is formed.

In addition, the effect pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 is performed. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbols, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbols. As the effect pattern 70a, patterns representing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The effect pattern 70a is stop-displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a mode (losing mode, big win mode, small win mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination. The big winning mode and the small winning mode are combinations of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the losing mode is other modes.

The variable display mode of the effect pattern 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be switched on the spot or rotated (rotated). good.

In addition, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device according to the result of the big hit determination. By being displayed in 71, the player's expectation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game) is heightened.

In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 performs the variable display of the production pattern 70a. You may perform the variable display of the production|presentation design 70a.

The first image display device 70 includes a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first reserved memory (U1) in the normal game state described later, and a time saving game state described later. In the normal pattern reserved icon display area 70D for displaying the number of normal pattern reserved icons corresponding to the normal pattern reserved storage (F), and the variable performance (variable display of the pattern) is being executed regardless of the game state. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating, the first reservation number display area 70E for numerically displaying the number of the first reservation memory (U1) regardless of the game state, and the game A second reserved number display area 70F for numerically displaying the number of the second reserved memory (U2) regardless of the state, and a normal figure for numerically displaying the number of the normal figure reserved memory (F) regardless of the game state. A reserved number display area 70G and the like are formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), and a third display section 70B3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. , and a fourth display portion 70B4 (fourth area). icon is displayed. Note that the icon corresponding to the second reserved storage (U2) is not displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays the second In the third display portion 70B3, a first reserved icon indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and in the third display portion 70B3, the first special symbol in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. A first pending icon indicating a pending memory is displayed, and a first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4.

The normal figure pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left, a first display portion 70D1 (first area), a second display portion 70D2 (second area), a third display portion 70D3 (third area), a fourth display portion 70D4 ( 4th area), and in the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4, the number of normal figure reserved icons corresponding to the number of second reserved memories (U2) is displayed. In addition, the icon corresponding to 2nd reservation memory|storage (U2) is not displayed on normal figure reservation icon display area 70D.

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays a normal pattern suspension icon indicating the normal pattern suspension storage in which the variable display of the normal symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays the normal symbol secondly. A normal pattern reserved icon indicating a general pattern reserved memory in which variable display of patterns is executed is displayed, and a normal pattern reserved icon indicating a normal pattern reserved memory in which variable display of a normal normal pattern is executed is displayed in the third display section 70D3. A figure suspension icon is displayed, and a normal figure suspension icon indicating a normal figure suspension storage in which variation display of normal symbols is executed fourthly is displayed on the fourth display portion 70D4.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image to be clearly distinguished from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the normal figure reserved icon display area 70D. The icon is displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the first suspended icons displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B move toward the icon display area 70C one by one. By moving (shifting), the first pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 is moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (deletes) at the end of

In addition, with the start of the variable display of the normal pattern (production pattern 70a), the normal pattern reserved icon displayed in the normal pattern reserved icon display area 70D moves (shifts) one by one toward the icon display area 70C. , The normal pattern pending icon displayed in the first display unit 70D1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70C, and the icon disappears at the end of the variable display of the normal pattern (effect pattern 70a). (to erase. In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the normal symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In this way, during the normal game state (first game state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is more important than the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal symbol holding icon corresponding to the normal symbol holding memory (F) Although the display is limited, it is possible to display the first reservation icon corresponding to the first reservation memory (U1), and the time-saving game state ( During the second game state), the display of the first reserved icon corresponding to the first reserved memory (U1) is restricted, but the display of the normal pattern reserved icon corresponding to the normal pattern reserved memory (F) is possible. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to realize the display of the pending icon according to the importance of the game state, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, regardless of whether it is in the normal game state (first game state) or in the time saving game state (second game state), the number display of the first reservation memory (U1) in the first reservation number display area 70E, Numerical display of the second reserved memory (U2) by the second reserved number display area 70F, and numerical display of the normal figure reserved memory (F) by the normal figure reserved number display area 70G are executed. Therefore, it is possible to always check various reserved memories, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving production modes A to C), when it is not a predetermined production mode (during a stock chance production described later), while displaying the pending icon or the icon corresponding to the normal symbol, the predetermined production mode ( During a stock chance production, which will be described later), the reserved icon corresponding to the normal symbol or the icon may not be displayed, or vice versa.

The movable effect device 73 has an operable first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined action, it is possible to execute an action effect. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, so that it is possible to emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the action effect. .

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is positioned at a standby position (first position) near the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 and at a center side (lower side) of the first image display device 70. It moves (rises and descends) between the presenting position (second position). The second movable member 73b moves between a waiting position (first position) covering a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position retreating from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

The variation notification LED 59 is composed of a full-color LED as a part of the board illumination device 74, and includes a first variation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol, a second variation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol, and a normal symbol. A third variation notification LED 59c corresponding to is provided.

The first variation notification LED 59a starts changing the color (variation display of the first lamp special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the stop of the variation display of the first special symbol. By stopping the change in color (variation display of the first lamp special pattern) (turns off if lost, emits light if it is a big hit), it is designed to notify whether the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner. . The second variation notification LED 59b starts changing the color (variation display of the second lamp special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol. By stopping the change in color (variation display of the second lamp special pattern) (turns off if lost, emits light if it is a big hit), it is designed to notify whether the second special pattern is fluctuating display. . The third variation notification LED 59c starts the color change (variation display of the third lamp special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variation display of the normal symbol, and the color change ( By stopping the variable display of the third lamp special pattern) (turns off if lost, emits light if hit), it is notified whether or not the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the combination of the stop-displayed production pattern 70a and the first lamp special pattern notifies the result of the fluctuation display (jackpot judgment) of the first special pattern, and the stop-displayed production pattern 70a and the second lamp special pattern. You may make it alert|report the result of the variable display (special game range) of a 2nd special design by a combination. In addition, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol (jackpot determination) is notified only by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol (jackpot determination) is notified only by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed. You may make it alert|report a result.

In addition, instead of performing the variable display of the first lamp special symbol, the second lamp special symbol and the third lamp special symbol by the first variation notification LED 59a, the second variation notification LED 59b and the third variation notification LED 59c, the first lamp special 3 types of simple special patterns that have the same function as the design, 2nd lamp special design and 3rd lamp special design If so, stop o) may be variably displayed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71 .

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility, etc. A main control device 110A containing a game ball storage part 96 for storing balls and supplying them to a payout device 95, a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A containing a payout control board 120, and a performance control board 130 are built in. A performance control device 130A, a power supply device 160A containing a power supply board 160, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer) are provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member 23 is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74). A selector switch 22 is provided for switching between adjustment modes related to the adjustment of the amount of light.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (jackpot judgment RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value (probability of judging a jackpot), and inputting a signal for shifting to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating the setting key. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the horizontal direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute setting. A numeric segment is configured to display numeric information indicating numeric values of values and performance information (see FIG. 41).

(Overall block diagram of game machine)
Next, control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls overall progress of the game (basic action), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110. A board 120, an effect control board 130 for controlling a game-related effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board for supplying power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. 160 is provided.

In addition, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to transmit and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the main control board 110. It is configured to be able to transmit commands only in one direction to the board 130 .

The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports. It has 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first start opening detection switch 45a, a second start opening detection switch 47a, and opening and closing of the second start opening. Solenoid 48b, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, specific area detection switch 53a, second big winning opening detection switch 56a, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b , magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol suspension display 63, second special symbol suspension display 64 , normal symbol holding display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control A substrate 120 and an effect control substrate 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission and reception of various control commands. It performs control processing and the like for transmitting game information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 .

In the "game information", the starting opening winning signal output each time a game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped. A pattern confirmation signal output every time, a jackpot signal output during a jackpot game, an opening signal output during a round game (opening of the big winning opening), output over a time-saving game state described later and a security signal output when a situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) that poses a problem (threat) in terms of security of the game machine 1 occurs.

It should be noted that the pattern confirmation signal is not output when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is stopped, but when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is stopped during the normal game state, the pattern confirmation signal is output. If the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped during the time-saving game state without outputting, the symbol determination signal may be output.

In addition, the starting hole winning signal is transmitted when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, but when the game ball wins the normal figure gate 44 is not output.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 95, and a switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that a game ball is stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage portion 96 of the above.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing regarding the payout of game balls. Thereby, control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 according to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting the command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, and the like (not shown).
The input/output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 by means of a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feed solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b, and launches the ball. When the detection signal from the volume 15b detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is adjusted so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to shoot game balls (99.9 balls/minute).

The production control board 130 is based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m and the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing for audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing for various light emitting members (such as LEDs) and various drive sources (such as motors) based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m. It has

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output ports of the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, control processing for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, various input devices (detection switch etc.) according to the detection signal from control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or outputs a predetermined sound to the audio output device 9. and control the output of sound.

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. The image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on the reception, the CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and the reception of the voice control command from the general control unit 141 It has an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) for controlling the audio output device 9 based on the data, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes an integrated CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which a LSI) is connected.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting the display control command (display list) to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device 9, and performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include the frame illumination device 10, the effect button driving device 17b (the effect button driving motor, the effect button vibration motor), the effect button light emission LED 17c, the starting port lamp 75, the movable effect device 73, the board A lighting device 74 is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to effects. As a result, the control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the effect button drive device 17b, the effect button emission LED 17c, the starting port lamp 75, the movable effect device 73, and the board lighting device 74 is performed.

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Effect control board 130 and various electronic components) (corresponding to power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (occurrence of a power failure), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in the power supply voltage (occurrence of a power failure). It has a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. Output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped when the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value during output.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from the power failure (power failure), the control state of the game can be restored to the state before the power failure (power failure). can be done.

In addition, although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130m, the payout control board 120 and A backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control section 130m. Also, the backup power may be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the effect control section 130m.

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" and a "time-saving game state" as states relating to the ease of winning a game ball into the second starting port 47.

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to "normal game state". Also, during the jackpot game, the "normal game state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" means that in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal figure gate 44, the probability of being determined as a hit is 1/20. There, the average time of the variable display of the normal pattern is set to about 5 seconds, and when the winning is won, the second start port 47 is opened in a short opening pattern (0.07 seconds that does not win substantially). It refers to the game state that

On the other hand, the "time-saving game state" means that the probability of being determined to be a hit is 1/20, and the average time of fluctuation display of normal symbols is shorter than the normal game state (about 1.5 seconds). and the second start port 47 is short open pattern (0.07 second open that does not substantially win) or long open pattern (3 seconds x 2 times open easy to win) when it is determined to be a hit It is open only in the long open pattern, and it is a game state advantageous to the player in which game balls are more likely to enter the second start port 47 than in the normal game state.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the game method of shooting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a and entering the game ball in the first start hole 45 is advantageous for the player, and in the time saving game state, the game area 5a. A game method in which a game ball is shot toward the right side area of , and the game ball enters the normal figure gate 44 and the second start port 47 is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the "time saving game state", the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state that are controlled after the end of the jackpot game described later (via the jackpot game), and the establishment of a predetermined condition (execute RWM clear , 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game). ) The third time-saving game state to be controlled is set.

In addition, the "time saving game state" is set to be more advantageous than the "normal game state" in terms of the average fluctuation time of normal symbols and the opening probability in the long opening pattern of the second start port 47. It may be set so that only one of the probability of being determined to be, the average fluctuation time of normal symbols, and the opening probability in the long opening pattern is advantageous.

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 5(a) stores the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 and/or the second start port 47. It is a diagram showing a determination information storage area, FIG. 5(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area, FIG. It is a general pattern determination information storage area in which normal pattern determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the special figure determination information storage area stores the special figure determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45. First special figure determination information holding storage A second special figure determination information holding storage area for storing special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, and a special figure determination information during execution of the variable display. It is divided into a special figure determination information storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are each divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit.

And the number of special figure determination information (holding information) of the first special symbol stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure judgment information holding storage area is the number of the first holding storage (U1) Then, the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the special figure determination information of these first special symbols are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B.

In addition, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) of the second special symbol stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure judgment information holding storage area is the number of second holding storage (U2) However, the number of pending icons corresponding to the special figure determination information of these second special symbols is not displayed.

In addition, the 0th storage section, which is a special figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C in the normal game state, and the special figure of the first special symbol stored in the 0th storage section. The icon corresponding to the determination information is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), each storage unit includes a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number storage area for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random number value.

Then, when the game ball wins (entrance) to the first start port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in a storage unit with a small number. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest number in which the special figure determination information is not stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is a special figure determination information execution storage area, is a special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage part of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. will be referenced to execute the

As shown in FIG. 5(c), the normal pattern determination information storage area is a normal pattern determination information holding storage area in which the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 is stored; It is divided into a normal pattern determination information execution storage area in which the normal pattern determination information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal pattern determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. .

Then, the number of general pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the general pattern determination information reservation storage area is the number of general pattern reservation storage (F), and the number corresponding to these general pattern determination information are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the normal diagram reservation icon display area 70D.

In addition, the 0th storage unit, which is the general pattern determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C in the time saving game state, and corresponds to the general pattern determination information stored in the 0th storage unit. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 5(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern for storing the random number value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern determination information is acquired, the normal pattern determination information is not stored in the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. Normal figure determination information is stored.

The 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the normal pattern is satisfied. It will be referred to for executing the variable display of normal symbols.

(Game flow of pachinko and pachislot machines)
A game flow of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG.

In the normal game state, when the first jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol (abbreviated as special 1 in the figure) is completed, the normal game state is entered and the first When the second jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol (special 1) is completed, the state is shifted to the first time-saving game state, and the result of the variable display of the first special symbol (special 1). When the third jackpot game of 5 rounds (10R) executed as is completed, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the third jackpot game of 10 rounds (10R) executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol (abbreviated as special 2 in the figure) is completed, the second time-saving game state is entered. Then, when the small winning game executed as a result of the variation display of the second special symbol (special 2) ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the normal game state is entered and the specific area is entered during the small winning game. When the fourth jackpot game of 6 rounds (6R: practically 5 rounds) executed by the game ball passing through 53 is completed, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, after clearing the RWM or after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of whether or not the time-saving game state has been passed, the variable display of the special symbols that are lost is continued, excluding the number of times of the variable display of the normal symbols. When it is executed a predetermined number of times (the total number of execution times of the first special symbol loss variation display and the second special symbol loss variation display is 750 times), it shifts to the third time saving game state.

In the time-saving game state, when the first jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol (special 1) is completed, the state is shifted to the normal game state, and the first special symbol (special 1) ), when the second jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of ) is completed, the state shifts to the first time-saving game state, and 10 rounds (10R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol. When the third jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the time saving game state, when the third jackpot game of 10 rounds (10R) executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol (special 2) is completed, the state is shifted to the second time saving game state, and the second special When the small winning game executed as a result of the variable display of the pattern (special 2) ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the original time-saving game state is maintained, and the specific area 53 is played during the small winning game. When the fourth jackpot game of 6 rounds (6R: practically 5 rounds) executed by the passage of the ball is completed, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, the remaining number of times of fluctuation display of normal symbols that can be executed in the time-saving game state (number of times of normal pattern fluctuations) is "0", that is, the number of times of execution of fluctuation display of normal symbols is the specified number of times (50 times, 100 times, 999 times ), or the remaining number of fluctuation display of special symbols that can be executed in the time saving game state regardless of whether the small winning game is executed (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is "0", that is, the second If the total number of execution times of the variation display of one special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol reaches a specified number of times (5 times or 10 times), the normal game state is entered.

The degree of advantage in each game state is normal game state<first time saving game state<second time saving game state<third time saving game state.

When the first jackpot game is executed regardless of the game state, the state shifts to the normal game state. However, when the first jackpot game is executed during the normal game state, the state shifts to the normal game state. On the other hand, when the first jackpot game is executed during the time-saving game state, the game may be shifted to the first time-saving game state.

In addition, although there is no type in the small winning game, the type may be provided in the small winning game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the first small winning game, the fourth big winning game of 5 rounds (5R) is executed, and after the fourth jackpot game is completed, the state is shifted to the second time-saving game state, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the second jackpot game, the fifth jackpot game of 10 rounds (10R) is executed. Then, after the fifth jackpot game is finished, the state may be shifted to the third time-saving game state. In this case, the first small winning game may be executed more easily than the second small winning game, or vice versa.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, preparation processing for starting game control, setting change processing for changing set values based on a setting change operation, and initialization of a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming setting values based on setting confirmation operation, various drive sources provided in the board unit 500 (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching Drive source initial operation processing and the like for initializing the solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are performed. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for reach determination. Update the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop in the power supply from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply that has been supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). Determines whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. Assuming that there is a possibility, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power cut-off designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that power cut-off processing has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in a payout counter set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, when the remaining payout designation command is received, the remaining payout specified by the remaining payout designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout designation command is not received, the remaining Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in a payout control process of timer interruption, which will be described later, and a command specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the remaining number of payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform data abnormality judgment of the main RAM 110c by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves in the main RAM 110c a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c has been backed up (power is restored). Wait until completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed. The game machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power restoration is saved in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, it is determined that the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S17. If the backup flag is not saved, the first power-on or irregular power restoration The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power interruption during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and clears the backup flag saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S19 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value (probability of judging the jackpot), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is changed (updated), and the setting key switch 112a is operated. Performs processing to determine the set value by . After completing this process, the process moves to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. to move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal because it is the first power-on or the above-described irregular power recovery, and the process proceeds to step S22. will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Notify of unrecoverable error" is to display an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 indicates that an unrecoverable error has occurred. An error sound (“This is an unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S23. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the RWM clearing operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the main RAM 110c) is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing in step S25. Specifically, various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the current A process for initially operating the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for a predetermined period is performed. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying an initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame Illumination device 10 for disk and illumination device 74 for disk are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the voice output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the RWM area is cleared on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. You may make it display the display which alert|reports that.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S28. Specifically, the setting value saved in the setting value (in-game) area of the main RAM 110c is displayed on the information display 113, and the setting key switch 112a is operated to end the confirmation of the setting value. .

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing in step S29. Specifically, the above-described various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the flow path switching solenoid 52b, the second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are initialized over a predetermined period. Perform processing to make it work. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing power supply recovery notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification or the like is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or The lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (eg, white) for a predetermined period (eg, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the power has been restored (from a power failure). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special figure reservation number designation command, a normal figure reservation number designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S32. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures and the number of reserved normal figures, and the processing for performing the reserved display on the image display device is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S33. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S34, and permits all interrupts in step S35 to control the progress of the game (main control). A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initialization process is finished.

In other words, from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is in a pre-start state before the start of the game progress control. It will be in a state where it is possible to play.

In this way, the state confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 70, and the second By checking the image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed. It is possible to recognize that it is inside. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

In addition, by not determining whether or not there is a setting change flag, even if the previous power failure occurred during setting change, the unrecoverable error process may not be performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). , and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric accessory.

The main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing in step S120. Specifically, the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special pattern, the random number for judging the special pattern variation pattern, the random number for judging the hit, the random number for judging the normal pattern, and the random number for judging the regular pattern fluctuation pattern are updated. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are incremented by +1 and updated. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The initial random value to be used is set as a new cycle initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs initial random value update processing in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S30, the process of updating the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. , determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the specific area detection switch 53a, and sets predetermined data if there is an input. Details of the input control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process in step S300. Specifically, determination of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, the fluctuation display of the first special design or the second special design, the big winning opening Processing such as opening/closing (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) and setting of the game state is performed. In addition, the detail of special figure special electric control processing is mentioned later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal/universal electric power control processing. Specifically, processing such as determination of acquired general pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the general pattern gate 44, normal symbol fluctuation display, opening and closing of the second start port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like are performed. In addition, the details of the general map general electric control processing are mentioned later.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs customer waiting control processing in step S450. Specifically, processing such as transmission of a customer waiting designation command to the performance control board 130 is performed assuming that the state is shifted to the customer waiting state when a special game (jackpot game, small winning game) or variable performance is not executed. Details of the customer waiting control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing in step S500. Specifically, various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c are referred to, and various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the big winning opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 .

The main CPU 110a performs abnormality determination processing in step S600. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as game balls winning in the second start port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, game balls winning in the big winning port when not in the special game, various winning Abnormal prize-winning error where the number of game balls that have won a prize does not match the number of game balls discharged from the prize-winning ball flow path, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error in which an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period of time, a door open error in which the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a during game progress control. or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) is generated, and a process for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the generated error to the effect control board 130 is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes processing for performing error notification.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the large winning opening opening/closing data output to the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, and the first special symbol Display device 60, special design display data output to second special design display device 61, normal design display data output to normal design display device 62, first special design reservation display device 63, second special design reservation display device 64 A process for creating data such as special symbol reserved display data to be output and normal symbol reserved display data to be output to the normal symbol reserved display device 65 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs external information data creation processing in step S720. Specifically, processing for creating game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S750. Specifically, a port output for outputting signals such as the starting opening opening/closing data created in step S700 and the big winning opening opening/closing data, or outputting a signal such as game information data created in step S720 Processing, display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reservation display data, normal symbol reservation display data, payout state confirmation for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 Sending a specified command to the payout control board 120 or referring to a prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) to be described later, a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after prohibiting the interrupt, the flag register is saved in the main RAM 110c, and processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation display processing in step S810. Specifically, the normal medium payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during normal gaming state, out during normal gaming state For counting game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. A game ball counting process, a normal base value ((normal medium payout number / normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the main RAM 110c is calculated. The normal base value calculation process that saves the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area, and the normal base value for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area ( Performance information) is switched every 5 seconds, and performance display data setting processing is performed to set performance display data for displaying on the information display device 113 .

Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game performance information that is not affected by changes in the set values (unrelated to the set values). By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it is possible to make use of this in grasping the performance of the game machine 1 .

In addition, the game section is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for doing so, and the normal base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing in step S830. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S850. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, processing for restoring the flag register from the main RAM 110c, permitting an interrupt, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear mode, and during the setting confirmation mode) before the progress control of the game is started, the timer interruption is not executed. Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and pays out the prize balls from the payout device 95. process.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball wins the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56 It is determined whether or not the game has been played, and processing for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the first start opening detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start opening 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and a prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. The details of the second start opening detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, the processing for determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the general pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing the general pattern determination information I do. Details of the gate detection switch input processing will be described later.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing, and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and sets predetermined data. Details of the specific area detection switch input process will be described later.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 11 . FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-ball counter used for the 3-ball prize by adding the data indicating the 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, determines the special figure. Acquire information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first reserved memory (U1) is less than four in step S230-4. When the first reserved memory (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first reserved memory (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start opening detection switch input process. exit.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first reserved memory (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1). The corresponding first special figure reservation number designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special figure pending number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the image display device displays the pending display corresponding to the first pending storage (U1) (display of the first pending icon, first pending number display area display) will be performed. In addition, a first reserved memory display (two LEDs) is provided so that the number of the first reserved memories (U1) can always be confirmed at a position where the player can visually recognize, and the effect control board 130 is connected to the image display device and the first memory. A reserved display corresponding to the first reserved memory (U1) may be displayed on the reserved memory display.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a free storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special feature acquired in step S230-3 in the free storage unit. The figure determination information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. When it is in the normal game state, the processing is moved to step S230-9 as prefetching processing of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, and the process is not in the normal game state. In this case, the current first start opening detection switch input process is terminated as not performing the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 .

The main CPU 110a performs the first special figure prefetching process (preliminary determination process) in step S230-9. In this first special figure pre-reading process, the special figure pre-determination table (see FIG. 23 (a) or FIG. 23 (b)) for pre-reading the special figure determination information (preliminary determination) is selected, and the special figure acquired this time Pre-determine the determination information before the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and generate a first special figure pre-reading designation command for notifying the production control board 130 of the result of the preliminary determination (special figure scheduled variation pattern). process. Details of the advance determination table will be described later.

Since this "first special figure prefetching designation command" is information that can specify the special figure scheduled variation pattern of the first special symbol, the effect control board 130 uses the first special figure prefetching designation command to specify the type of special symbol, It is also possible to specify the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot game (number of rounds), and the type of time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first special figure prefetch designation command generated in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first special figure look-ahead winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and one or a plurality of variation displays are displayed before the start of the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first special figure look-ahead specification command. A look-ahead notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) is executed to expect that the jackpot game will be executed over a period of time.

Although the upper limit of the first reserved storage (U1) is set to "4", it may be larger or smaller. Also, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage may be decreased or increased as compared with the upper limit value of the second reserved storage. Furthermore, the first reservation storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the first special figure determination information storage area.

In addition, when it is in the normal game state, the first special figure prefetching process is performed, the first special figure prefetching designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the prefetching notice is executed, but the game state Regardless, the first special figure prefetching process is performed to transmit the first special figure prefetching designation command to the performance control board 130, and when the performance control board 130 is in the normal game state, the prefetching notice performance is executed. , In the case of the time-saving game state, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted (not executed, executed at a lower probability than in the normal game state, etc.).

(Processing for inputting the second start opening detection switch on the main control board)
The second start opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 12 . FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the second starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and when the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current first 2 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding data indicating two prize balls to the two prize ball counter used for two prize balls to update the counter, and in step S240-3, determines a special figure. Acquire information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second reserved memory (U2) is less than four in step S240-4. When the second reserved memory (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-5, and when the second reserved memory (U2) is not less than 4, the current second start opening detection switch input process. exit.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second reserved memory (U2) and updates it (U2←U2+1). The corresponding second special figure reservation number designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the second special figure reservation number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the reservation display (display of the second reservation number display area 70F) corresponding to the second reservation storage (U2) is performed on the image display device. It will be. In addition, a second reserved memory display (two LEDs) is provided at a position where the player can always confirm the number of the second reserved memories (U2), and the effect control board 130 is connected to the image display device and the second memory. A reserved display corresponding to the second reserved memory (U2) may be displayed on the reserved memory display.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a free storage unit from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special feature acquired in step S240-3 in the free storage unit. The figure determination information is stored.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the time-saving game state. If it is in the time-saving gaming state, the processing is moved to step S240-9 as prefetching processing of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, and during the non-time-saving gaming state If not, the second start opening detection switch input process is terminated as not performing the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 47.

The main CPU 110a performs the second special figure prefetching process (preliminary determination process) in step S240-9. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the special figure pre-determination table (see FIG. 23 (c) or FIG. 23 (d)) for pre-reading the special figure determination information (preliminary determination) is selected, and the special figure acquired this time 2nd special figure pre-reading specification for notifying the production control board 130 of the result of the prior determination (special figure scheduled variation pattern, look-ahead information) of the determination information before the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Perform processing to generate commands.

Since this "second special figure prefetching designation command" is information that can specify the determination result of the special figure determination information, the effect control board 130 uses the second special figure prefetching designation command to determine the type of the second special symbol, the jackpot. Judgment results, types of special symbols, types of jackpot games and small hit games (number of rounds), various times of time reduction (J1, J2, J3) in the normal time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game can also be specified. .

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets the second special figure prefetch designation command generated in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.
As a result, the second special figure prefetching designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and from before the start of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second special figure prefetching designation command, one or more variable display A pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) is executed to expect that the jackpot game will be executed over a long period of time.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the second reserved storage (U2) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved storage may be less than the upper limit of the first reserved storage. Furthermore, the second reservation storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area.

In addition, when it is in the time saving game state, the second special figure prefetching process is performed, the second special figure prefetching designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the prefetching notice is executed, but the game state In spite of this, the second special figure look-ahead processing is performed so that the second special figure look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and when the performance control board 130 is in a time-saving game state, the look-ahead notice performance is executed. , In the normal game state, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted (not executed, executed at a lower probability than in the time-saving game state, etc.).

(Gate detection switch input processing on the main control board)
The gate detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing gate detection switch input processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input. If the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, the process proceeds to step S250-2, and if the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is not input, the current gate detection switch input process is terminated. do.

In step S250-2, the main CPU 110a acquires normal pattern determination information (random number value for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, random value for normal pattern variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the general pattern reservation memory (F) is less than 4 in step S250-3. If the general pattern reservation memory (F) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S250-4, and if the general pattern reservation memory (F) is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input processing of this time is terminated. .

In step S250-4, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the general pattern reservation memory (F) and updates it (F←F+1). The corresponding normal figure pending number designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the general pattern reservation number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of general pattern reservation icons corresponding to the general pattern reservation storage (F) is displayed on the image display device. In addition, a general pattern reservation memory display (two LEDs) is provided so that the number of general pattern reservation memories (F) can always be confirmed at a position where the player can visually recognize, and the effect control board 130 is an image display device and a general pattern. You may make it carry out the reservation display corresponding to the normal figure reservation memory (F) in the reservation memory display.

In step S250-6, the main CPU 110a searches for an open storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal pattern determination information storage area, and stores the open storage unit in the normal pattern determination acquired in step S250-2. Store information.

In step S250-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the time-saving game state. If it is in the time-saving game state, the processing is moved to step S250-8 as prefetching processing of the normal-pattern determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the normal-pattern gate 44, and the process is not in the non-time-saving gaming state In this case, the current gate detection switch input processing is terminated as not performing the pre-reading processing of the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 .

In step S250-8, the main CPU 110a performs general map look-ahead processing (preliminary determination processing). In this general pattern pre-reading process, the general pattern pre-determination table (see FIG. 36 (a) or FIG. 36 (b)) for pre-reading (preliminary determination) the general pattern determination information is selected, and the general pattern determination information acquired this time is pre-determined before the fluctuation display of the normal pattern is performed, and the result of the pre-determination (normal pattern scheduled fluctuation pattern, pre-reading information) is generated. conduct.

Since this "normal pattern prefetching specification command" is information that can specify the determination result of the general pattern determination information, the effect control board 130 uses the normal pattern prefetching specification command to determine the type of normal pattern, the determination result of the hit determination, and the normal pattern. It is also possible to specify the type of symbol and the type of auxiliary game (short open, long open).

In step S250-9, the main CPU 110a sets the normal map prefetch designation command generated in step S250-8 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the general pattern look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and from before the start of the variable display of the normal pattern corresponding to the general pattern look-ahead designation command, the variable display of one or more normal patterns is assisted. A pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) for expecting the execution of the game is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the general pattern reservation memory (F) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the normal pattern reserved memory may be reduced or increased as compared with the upper limit of the first reserved memory. Furthermore, the general pattern reservation storage itself may be eliminated by storing the general pattern determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the general pattern determination information storage area.

In addition, in the case of the time-saving game state, the general pattern prefetching process is performed, the general pattern prefetching designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the preprediction is executed, but regardless of the game state. A general pattern prefetching process is performed to transmit a general pattern prefetching designation command to the performance control board 130, and when the performance control board 130 is in a time-saving game state, a prefetching notice performance is executed, and when it is in a normal game state. You may make it restrict|limit execution of the advance notice production|presentation (it is not performed, it is performed with a lower probability than a time-saving game state, etc.).

(Specific area detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The specific area detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a. If the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is input, the process proceeds to step S260-2, and if the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is not input, the current specific area detection switch input End the process.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current specific area validity period during which passage of game balls to the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small winning game (conversion game) is in progress. If it is during the small winning game, the process is moved to step S260-3, and if it is not during the specified area effective period, the process is moved to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a generates a specific area passage flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and a specific flag indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53. Area passage time game state information (information indicating that it is in the normal game state if the current is in the normal game state, information indicating that it is in the time saving game state if the current is in the time saving game state) is set in the main RAM 110c, In step S260-4, a specific area passage designation command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the specific area valid period is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the current specific area detection switch is input. End the process.

As a result, a specific area passage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a passage notification effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (execution of a jackpot game) is executed. Therefore, the player can grasp that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the current specific area. Terminate the detection switch input process.

As a result, a specified area passage error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passage error notification performance for notifying the occurrence of a passage error in which the game ball passes the specified area 53 at an abnormal timing is executed. Therefore, the employee of the game parlor can grasp the occurrence of the passage error and take appropriate measures.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the processing for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the pending memory (special figure determination information) and the special figure special electric processing data are changed to "1" A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for performing a process for performing the special symbol memory determination process (step S310) is executed, and the current special figure special electric control process is terminated.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the special figure is stopped and displayed according to the passage of the fluctuation time, and the special figure special electric processing data is changed to "2". A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing processing etc. is executed, and the current special figure special electric control process is terminated.
If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0" if the special symbol is a losing special symbol, and the opening time of the jackpot game is set if the special symbol is a special symbol. Then, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small winning special symbol, the opening time of the small winning game is set and the special symbol stop processing ( Step S330) is executed, and the current special figure special electric control process ends.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot game processing ( Step S340) is executed, and the current special figure special electric control process ends.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the special figure special electric processing data is changed to "0" or "3" based on the processing for executing the small winning game and the ending of the small winning game. A small hit game process (step S350) is executed for this, and the special figure special electric control process of this time is ended.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 5, the jackpot game end processing for performing the processing for ending the jackpot game, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the jackpot game, etc. (Step S360) is executed, and the current special figure special electric control processing ends.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second reserved memory (U2) is 1 or more. If the second reserved memory (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second reserved memory (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

The main CPU 110a, in step S310-3, updates the second reservation storage (U2) by subtracting "1", in step S310-6, the special figure reservation number after subtraction, here the second reservation storage (U2) The second special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the second special figure pending number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for updating the display of the pending icon and the icon displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, the game state grasped by the performance control board 130 is updated, or the performance corresponding to the updated game state is performed.

In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the second special figure determination information storage area, and shifts the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units into one. Shift to the previous memory.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first reserved memory (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. When the first reserved memory (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and when the first reserved memory (U1) is not 1 or more, the special symbol memory determination process of this time is terminated. .

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation memory (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special figure reservation number after the subtraction, here in the first reservation memory (U1) The corresponding first special figure reservation number designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special figure pending number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the display of the pending icon and the icon displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, the game state grasped by the performance control board 130 is updated, or the performance corresponding to the updated game state is performed.

In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and shifts the special symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units to the previous one. to the storage part of

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, along with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation memory (U1) and the second reservation memory (U2) after subtraction are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. set to As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the second holding storage is shifted to the first holding storage area). However, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted (first The reserved memory and the second reserved memory may be subtracted in order of winning), or the first special figure determination information reserved storage area is prioritized over the second special figure determination information reserved storage area (first reserved memory (subtraction) may be performed with priority over the second reserved storage.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit and the stop special figure data of the special symbols based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. Execute the jackpot determination process. The details of the big hit determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process for determining a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. I do. The details of the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and terminates the current special symbol storage determination process.

It should be noted that, in step S310-6, to transmit only the special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the subtracted special figure reservation number (first reservation storage (U1), second reservation storage (U2)) However, the special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the special figure reservation number that has been subtracted and the special figure reservation number that has not been subtracted, that is, both the first special figure reservation number designation command and the second special figure reservation number designation command may be sent. In this way, for example, even if the special symbol pending number designation command transmitted at the start of the variable display of the previous special symbol in the effect control board 130 is not normally received (missed), the next special symbol It is possible to correct the first reservation memory (U1) and the second reservation memory (U2) to a normal value by the special figure reservation number designation command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation display.

(Jackpot judgment processing of the main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, a special A jackpot determination table (see FIG. 18(a) or FIG. 18(b)) is selected according to the type of symbol. Details of the big hit determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a collates the current set value and the random value for judging a big win with the big-hit judging table to judge whether or not it is a big win (whether or not it is a small win). If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-4, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the game state information at the time of winning the big win in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. A table (see FIG. 19(a)) is selected, and the process moves to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for big hits will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a collates the current set value and the random number value for big win determination with the big win determination table to determine whether or not it is a small win. If it is a small win, the process moves to step S311-7, and if it is not a small win, it is assumed that the win is lost and the process moves to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects the small winning special symbol determination table (see FIG. 19(b)) for determining the type of the small winning special symbol, and shifts the process to step S311-11. In addition, the details of the special symbol determination table for small hits will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for losing (see FIG. 19(c)) for determining the losing special symbol, and shifts the process to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for normal losing will be described later.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the random number value for special symbol determination with the special symbol determination table for which the jackpot determination is to be performed, A special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is determined.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the big hit determination process.

(jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 18(a) is a big hit determination table for the first special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , FIG. 18(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), in the jackpot determination table, the current set value, the random number for jackpot determination, and the determination result (big win, small win, loss) are associated with each other. As a reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of "big win" and "small win" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 18(a) or the second special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Based on the numerical value, it is determined whether it is a "big win", a "small win", or a "normal loss".

For example, according to the second special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 860 random numbers for judging a big win from "300" to "59998" are judged as "small hits", and other random numbers for judging a big win are judged as "losing".

In addition, in the big hit determination table for the second special symbol, "loss" is set, but even if random numbers other than the big hit are determined to be "small hit" without setting the loss good.

(Special pattern judgment table)
FIG. 19(a) is a special symbol determination table for a big hit that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined as a big hit, and FIG. 19(b) is determined as a small hit. It is a special symbol determination table for a small hit that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol at the time, and FIG. It is a special symbol determination table for.

As shown in FIGS. 19(a) to 19(c), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol for determining the stop symbol, the random number for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol determination, The stop special figure data indicating the determination result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated with each other, and for reference, the lighting mode of the LED in the special symbol indicator is described in the rightmost column. there is

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special pattern "01" is a special jackpot pattern for executing a first jackpot game consisting of five round games, and the special pattern "02" is for executing a second jackpot game consisting of five round games. The special pattern "03" is a special jackpot pattern for executing the third jackpot game consisting of 10 round games, and the special pattern "11" is the above-mentioned third jackpot game. It is a big winning symbol to be executed, and the special symbol "12" is a small winning special symbol to execute a small winning game.

Although details will be described later, the degree of advantage of various jackpot games is first jackpot game<second jackpot game<third jackpot game.

As the first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 19, the LED (light emitting member) of the special symbol indicator that lights up when displaying the small winning special symbol lights up when displaying the losing special symbol. The point is that the same LED (light emitting member) as the special symbol display is included. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that it is not a big winning special symbol but a small winning special symbol or a losing special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. , Any one of the first to third jackpot games can be executed, and when the special symbol determination information (second special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 is determined to be a jackpot Another point is that it is possible to execute the third jackpot game. By doing so, the type of jackpot game that can be executed changes according to the type of the special symbol, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Although each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with one unsuccessful special symbol, at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special symbols. good too.

Also, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that is lit when displaying the big hit special symbol may be more than three or may be less than three. Also, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that lights when displaying the small winning special symbol may be more than two or may be less than two, but even in this case, the big winning special symbol It may be made different from the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying .

In addition, the LED of the special symbol indicator that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol and the LED of the special symbol indicator that lights up when displaying the losing special symbol are not included (if they are completely different can be used).

Also, although the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol does not win a small win, it may be possible to win a small win. In this case, it is preferable to make the winning probability lower than that of the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Special figure variation pattern determination processing of the main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S313-2, and if it is not in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S313-3 assuming that it is in the time-saving game state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding (matching game situation) table from the normal special figure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 21) for determining the special figure variation pattern in the normal game state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure variation pattern determination table for normal will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects a table that corresponds (matches the game situation) from the special figure variation pattern determination table for time saving (see FIG. 22) for determining the special figure variation pattern in the time saving gaming state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure variation pattern determination table for time saving will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol type, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random number value, the pending number (U1 or U2), and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value. A special figure variation pattern is determined by collating with a special figure variation pattern determination table.

The main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S313-5, and the special figure variation corresponding to the determined variation pattern in step S313-6. A pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect, is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a determines the number of variations stored in the main RAM 110c. The number of fluctuation display of the pattern is updated by +1. The number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a first special symbol variable display, or a second special symbol variable display. It should be noted that the number of fluctuations will be referred to in special symbol fluctuation processing, which will be described later.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the time-saving gaming state. If it is not in the time-saving gaming state, this special figure variation pattern determination table is terminated, and if it is in the time-saving gaming state, in step S313-9, the remaining number of time-saving special figures that is the remaining number of time-saving special symbols ( J) Set the time-saving number designation command according to J) in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the command for specifying the number of times of shortening of working hours is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of times of shortening of working hours remaining in the special symbol can be grasped by the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When this process is finished, the special figure variation pattern determination process of this time is finished.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the probability of being determined as a jackpot is higher than the normal game state, the variable game state (high probability short-time game state) is not generated. However, when generating a probability variable game state different from the normal time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state (for example, after the end of the second jackpot game, etc.), the number of times of variation is updated in the probability variable game state. It is better not to

In addition, a command indicating the remaining number of time-saving special figures (J) is sent as a time-saving number of times designation command, but not only the number of remaining time-saving special figures (J), but also the remaining number of time-saving small hits (Z) and time-saving You may make it transmit the command which shows the normal figure remaining number of times (G).

In addition, in the time-saving game state, a time-saving number of times specification command indicating the number of time-saving special figures remaining (J) is transmitted. (Only the number of remaining time-saving normal figures (G) is notified), so it may be possible not to transmit the time-saving number of times designation command indicating the number of remaining time-saving special figures (J).

(Normal special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 21 is a normal special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the special symbol variation pattern in the normal game state.

Specifically, FIG. 21(a) is when there is no big win history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is big win history information and the number of special symbol fluctuations up to the third time-saving game state is 51 times or more. 21 (b) is a special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for normal that is referred to when performing variation display of special symbols (normal production modes A to D), and FIG. There is a normal special figure variation pattern determination table 2 that is referred to when the variation display is performed when the number of variations of the special symbols up to the third time saving game state is 50 times or less (during the countdown mode described later) be.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for time saving)
FIG. 22 is a special figure variation pattern determination table for time saving which is referred to when determining a special symbol variation pattern in the time saving game state.

Specifically, FIG. 22(a) shows that when executing the variable display of special symbols during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game by the first special symbol It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for time saving to be referred to, and FIG. 22 (b) is a time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state) after the jackpot game by the second special symbol ends Or, it is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for time saving which is referred to when executing the fluctuation display of the special symbol during the third time saving game state.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 22, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) that performs variable display, the determination result of the big hit determination, and the determination result of the special symbol (stop special symbol data ), the random number for reach determination, the first reservation memory (U1) or the second reservation memory (U2), the random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, the special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, and the special symbol It is associated with variable time, and the content of the variable performance is described as a reference.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify at least the type of special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, although the details will be described later, since the big winning game and the small winning game are executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the big winning game and the small winning game can be specified. In addition, since the number of times of the time-saving game state (number of times of time-saving) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of times of time-saving can be specified.

As production contents shown in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. , means that a variable production that stops without becoming a reach is executed.

In addition, "reach" refers to a jackpot game or a second game in which a part of the combination of the performance symbols 70a that informs the big hit by the special symbol or the hit by the normal symbol is temporarily stopped, and the other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode in which the player expects that the auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is opened for a long time is executed. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for reporting a big win, the same performance symbols 70a are set to "7" in the left and right areas. is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

Nine types of "111" to "999" are set as combinations (jackpot result modes) of the effect pattern 70a for informing the big win, and the effect pattern 70a for informing the hit that the second starting port 47 will open for a long time. 7 types of "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and "999" are set as a combination (hitting result mode), and some overlap, The combination of the performance symbols 70a for informing the big win may be a combination of odd numbers, and the combination of the performance symbols 70a for informing the winning of the long opening of the second starting port 47 may be a combination of even numbers so that they do not overlap each other. .

"Temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a shakes slightly or deforms slightly, making it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (not completely stopped). ) refers to the mode.

"Normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the remaining one effect pattern 70a fluctuates in the central area. It's becoming In the present embodiment, the "normal reach" does not give a big hit, but the "normal reach" may give a big win.

"SP reach" is performed after normal reach, and is a super reach production that has a higher expectation of a big hit than normal reach.

"SPSP Reach" is a special reach performance that is performed after normal reach or after super reach, and has a higher expectation of a big win than super reach. For example, the three production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to produce a more special production than "SP reach".

"Full rotation reach" is a reach that is performed after normal reach or after super reach, and is a reach that determines a big hit. For example, from the blackout effect, the three effect patterns 70a are all the same and are changed at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a more special effect than "SPSP reach". ing.

The ``special performance'' means that a ``BONUS is approaching'' is displayed without performing a ready-to-win performance, thereby performing a performance notifying that a big winning game or a small winning game will be executed. It should be noted that the message "BONUS is approaching" may be displayed while performing the ready-to-win effect.

"Short stock chance fluctuation" means that by aiming to execute an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 47 in a long opening pattern by passing the game ball to the normal figure gate 44, the second game that is almost a big hit or a small hit A chance production is performed to inform that it is a chance to increase (stock the reserved memory) the second reserved memory (U2) for executing the variable display of the special symbols.

"Middle stock chance fluctuation" is aimed at executing an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 47 in a long opening pattern by passing a game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 for a longer time than the short stock chance fluctuation. , a chance production is performed to notify that it is a chance to increase (stock the reserved memory) the second reserved memory (U2) for executing the variable display of the second special symbol that is almost a big hit or a small hit. ing.

"Long stock chance fluctuation" is aimed at executing an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 47 in a long opening pattern by passing a game ball through the normal pattern gate 44 for a longer time than the middle stock chance fluctuation. , a chance production is performed to notify that it is a chance to increase (stock the reserved memory) the second reserved memory (U2) for executing the variable display of the second special symbol that is almost a big hit or a small hit. ing.

As the first feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The point is that the figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be switched. By doing so, the variable display of the special symbols can be executed in a manner that the player is less likely to get bored, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As the second feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The point is that the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined using the figure variation pattern determination table. By doing so, it is possible to appeal to the player that the occurrence of the third time-saving game state is approaching by means of the variation pattern of the special symbols, and to switch the variation pattern of the special symbols according to the switching of the performance mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 21 to 22 is that in the time-saving gaming state, the special figure variation pattern determination table is not switched depending on the number of special symbol variations. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property different from the normal game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fourth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. One of the points is that the ready-to-win effect is not executed when the variable display of the symbols is executed. By doing so, in the normal game state, the player pays attention to the variable performance executed during the variable display of the special symbols, and in the time-saving game state, the game is focused on the variable performance executed during the variable display of the normal symbols. It is possible to attract the attention of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As the fifth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 21 to 22, in the time saving gaming state, the variation of the second special symbol is more than the case where the variation display of the first special symbol results in a big hit. As a result of the display, when it becomes a big hit, there is a point that the special figure variation pattern with a long variation time is easily executed. By doing so, it becomes easier to enhance the performance effect in the case of a big win as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. As a result of the fluctuation display, when it becomes a big hit, it is easier to execute the special figure fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time. By doing so, it becomes easier to enhance the performance effect in the case of a big win as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the switching of the special figure variation pattern determination table is only once in the normal game state, multiple times according to the number of variations of the special symbol (for example, 250 times, 500 times, 3 times at 750 times) It may be switched, and the special symbol variation pattern determination table may be switched once or multiple times according to the number of variations of the special symbol in the time saving game state, but the time saving game state is better than the normal game state However, the special figure variation pattern determination table is difficult to switch (normal game state is easier to switch the special figure variation pattern determination table, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the time-saving game state, the ready-to-win effect may be executed, and in this case, even if the same determination result (big hit, loss) is made, it is more than the normal game state. It is better to execute the reach effect with a lower probability, and the reach effect is easier to execute in the case of a big win than in the case of a small win (the execution probability is higher in the case of a big win, and the If it is a hit, it may not be executed, etc.).

In addition, in the normal game state, when there is no jackpot history, while using the normal special figure variation pattern determination table 1 of FIG. Although the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for is used, even if there is no jackpot history, if there is a small hit history (a case where the small hit game was executed but the jackpot game was not executed, etc.) , The normal special figure variation pattern determination table 2 of FIG. 21(b) may be used.

(Special figure advance judgment table)
FIG. 23 is a special figure pre-determination table referred to when pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening.

Specifically, FIG. 23(a) shows that when the main RAM 110c is in the normal game state and there is no jackpot history information, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of special symbol fluctuations up to the third time-saving game state is It is a normal special figure advance determination table 1 that is referred to when it is 51 times or more, and FIG. It is a normal special figure advance determination table 2 that is referred to when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is 50 times or less.

In addition, FIG. 23(c) is a special figure pre-determination table 1 for time reduction which is referred to during the time reduction game state (first time reduction game state, second time reduction game state) after the end of the jackpot by the first special symbol. , FIG. 23(d) is a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game with the second special symbol, or during the third time-saving game state. Fig. 2 is a preliminary determination table 2;

As shown in FIG. 23, the special symbol pre-determination table includes the game state, the type of special symbol (starting port), the determination result of the big hit determination (random number for judging the big hit), and the determination result of the special symbol (special Pattern judgment random number), reach judgment random number, special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random number, special figure planned fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, and look-ahead information corresponding to the special figure planned fluctuation pattern are associated The contents of the production are described as a reference.

Therefore, "special figure scheduled variation pattern" and "prefetch information" can be said to be capable of specifying at least the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed. . In addition, although the details will be described later, since the big winning game and the small winning game are executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the big winning game and the small winning game can be specified. In addition, since the number of times of the time-saving game state (number of times of time-saving) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of times of time-saving can be specified.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special figure variation pattern determination process has elapsed. When the variation time has passed, the process is moved to step S320-2, and when the variation time has not passed, the special symbol variation process of this time is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stop-displays the special symbol that has been determined in the above-described big win determination process, and in step S320-3 sets a stop time corresponding to the game situation in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, 8.0 seconds is set if it is the variable display of the final round of the time saving game state, and 0.5 seconds is set if it is other variable display.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a time saving flag (one of the first time saving flag, second time saving flag, and third time saving flag) is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time saving flag is set, the processing is moved to step S320-5 as updating the time saving special figure remaining number (J) and / or the time saving small per remaining number (Z), and the time saving flag is set If not, the process moves to step S320-11 as not to update the remaining number of time saving special figure (J) and / or the remaining number of time saving small per (Z).

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a, regardless of whether the stopped special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, saves the number of times of the special symbols saved in the main RAM 110c. "1" is subtracted from the special figure remaining number (J), and in step S320-6, it is determined whether or not the time saving special figure remaining number (J) has become "0". When the time saving special figure remaining number becomes "0", the processing is moved to step S320-10 assuming that the time saving game state is terminated, and if the time saving special figure remaining number is not "0", The process moves to step S320-7.

In step S320-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a small winning special symbol. If it is not a small winning special symbol, the processing is shifted to step S320-11 assuming that the end condition of the time saving game state other than the big winning is not established, and if it is a small winning special symbol, in step S320-8, the main "1" is subtracted from the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), which is the number of time-saving games saved in the RAM 110c.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining number of short time wins (Z) has reached "0". When the remaining number of time-saving small hits (Z) becomes "0", the process is shifted to step S320-10 assuming that the time-saving game state is terminated, and the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) becomes "0". If not, the process proceeds to step S320-11 assuming that the condition for ending the time-saving game state other than the big hit is not established.

In step S320-10, the main CPU 110a clears the time-saving flag and each remaining time-saving number of times (time-saving special figure remaining number of times (J), time-saving small winning number of remaining times (Z), time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G)) from the main RAM 110c. Then, the time-saving game state is terminated and the normal game state is entered.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. If it is not a special jackpot pattern, the process proceeds to step S320-13, and if it is a special jackpot pattern, in step S320-12, from the main RAM 110c, the time saving flag and each remaining time saving number (remaining time saving number (J ), the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), and the remaining number of time-saving general patterns (G)) are cleared, and the time-saving game state is terminated to shift to the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state).

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations saved in the main RAM 110c (total consecutive number of times of losing fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has reached a specified number of times (750 times). determine whether When the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, the process is moved to step S320-14 assuming that the third time-saving gaming state is started, and when the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the third time-saving gaming state is not started, and the process proceeds to step S320-17.

In step S320-14, the main CPU 110a stores the main RAM 110c in the main RAM 110c for the third time-saving game state. number of times (G) = 999), in step S320-15, set the third time-saving flag in the main RAM 110c to shift to the third time-saving game state, and in step S320-16, the time-saving number of times designation command is sent to the main RAM 110c is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, a time saving number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 performs a process of updating the remaining number of times of saving time or notifying the remaining number of times of saving time.

The main CPU 110a sets "2" to the special figure special electric processing data in step S320-17, and in step S320-18, the game state corresponding to the current game state (the game state specified by the presence or absence of the time saving flag). The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the game state is performed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When this process is finished, the special symbol variation process of this time is finished.

In this way, when the time-saving special figure remaining number of times (J) becomes "0" during the time-saving game state, even if the time-saving small remaining number of times (Z) or the time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G) remains Also, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) is terminated. Therefore, the time-saving game state can be ended according to the progress of the game (execution status of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol), and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times of the time-saving special symbol (J) is subtracted. Therefore, it is possible to provide a fair game by suppressing the fact that the game result becomes advantageous depending on the game method of the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the remaining number of times of saving time (Z) becomes "0" during the time saving game state, even if the remaining number of times of saving time special figure (J) or the remaining number of times saving normal figure (G) remains, Time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) is to end. Therefore, if the player tries to proceed with the game in an advantageous manner by referring to the kind of special symbols (combination of the effect symbols 70a) that are displayed in a look-ahead effect or stop display (a game ball passing through the specific area 53 in a small winning game is advantageous). Whether or not a big win is aimed at), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the game method during the time-saving game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the total number of consecutive times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol losing variation display executed from the establishment of the first condition (RWM clear) has reached the specified number of times (variation display of the special symbol of the specified number of times ), and the total number of consecutive times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol losing variation display executed from the establishment of the second condition (0 clear of the number of variations due to the end of the jackpot game) is the specified number of times When it reaches (the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times was a losing result), for a predetermined period of time (remaining number of time-saving special patterns (J), remaining number of time-saving small hits (Z), remaining number of time-saving normal patterns (G ) becomes “0”), it is possible to generate the third time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the unexpectedness that the time saving state occurs without going through the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of remaining time saving special figures (J) set when the third time saving game state occurs Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the third time-saving gaming state ends due to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols based on the reserved memory that is stored when the third time-saving gaming state occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) set when the third time-saving gaming state occurs is a value larger than one. Therefore, after the occurrence of the third time-saving game state, the small winning game is executed without the player understanding the situation, and the third time-saving game state ends without allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 53. Such inconvenience can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, when the third time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to zero. Therefore, during the jackpot game (after the special time-saving game state has started or ended), the third time-saving game state will not occur again, and the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side can be secured. , it is also possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the third time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a third time-saving occurrence completion flag indicating that the third time-saving gaming state has occurred is set to the main RAM 110c. may be set to In this case, if there is no third time-saving occurrence flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times (750 times), the number of times of fluctuation is cleared to 0 to generate the third time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving occurrence flag is If so, it is preferable to clear the number of fluctuations to 0 so as not to generate the third time-saving game state.

Also, when the third time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of remaining time-saving special figures (J) was set to 10 times when the third time-saving gaming state did not end immediately, but the first suspension memory (U1) and the second It may be more than the upper limit memory number "4" of the reserved memory (U2), and may be more or less than 10 times. In addition, when the third time-saving game state occurs, the remaining number of time-saving small hits was set to three times, which does not immediately end the third time-saving game state. may be used, or may be less. In addition, when the third time-saving game state occurred, the remaining time-saving normal figure number (G) was set to 999 times, but it is different from the time-saving special figure remaining number (J) and the time-saving small number of times (Z). Any value may be used, and may be more or less than 999 times.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing (at the start of the stop display of the special symbols), the third time-saving gaming state is generated, or various time-saving gaming states are terminated, but special symbol stop processing (special symbol at the end of the stop display), a third time-saving game state may be generated, or various time-saving game states may be terminated.

(Special symbol stop processing of the main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time set in the above-described special symbol variation process has elapsed. When the stop time has passed, the process is moved to step S330-2, and when the stop time has not passed, the special symbol stop process of this time is ended.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special jackpot symbol is stopped. If it is a big hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-3, and if it is not a big hit special symbol (it is a small hit special symbol or a losing special symbol), the process is moved to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot according to the stop special pattern data (jackpot special pattern) from the jackpot game jackpot control data determination table (see FIG. 26(a)) for executing the jackpot game. A jackpot opening transition process such as selecting game control data (maximum number of round games played, maximum winning number, opening time, etc.) "3" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8. The details of the big winning opening control data determination table for the big winning game will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small winning special symbol is stopped. If it is a small winning special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-6, and if it is not a small winning special symbol (it is a losing special symbol), the process is moved to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a changes the stop special symbol data (small winning special symbol) from the large winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game for executing the small winning game (see FIG. 26(b)). Small winning opening transition processing such as selecting control data (maximum number of prizes, opening time, etc.) of small winning game is performed according to "4" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8.

The main CPU 110a sets the opening time according to the selected control data in the main RAM 110c in step S330-8, and sets the opening designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S330-9. As a result, the opening specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the opening effect of the big winning game or the small winning game is performed. When this process is finished, the special symbol stop process of this time is ended.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to shift the process to the special symbol storage determination process, and terminates the current special symbol stop processing.

(control data table)
FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing a big winning opening control data determination table for a big winning game for controlling a big winning opening during a big winning game (special game), and FIG. 26(b) shows a small winning game. It is a diagram showing a large winning opening control data determination table for a small winning game for controlling a large winning opening inside, and FIG. 26 (c) is a small winning game for controlling a specific area during a small winning game FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific area control data determination table for the .

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the big winning opening control data determination table for the big winning game includes the stop special figure data of the special symbol, the maximum number of round games in the big winning game, and the big winning opening in one round game. The maximum number of prizes to be won, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the type of the big prize opening to be opened in each round game, and the maximum opening of the big prize opening to be opened in each round game The number of times, the opening time of the large winning opening for one opening of each round game, and the interval time during which the large winning opening is closed after the end of the round game (to discharge the game balls from the large winning opening required time) is associated with the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game.

When the stop special figure data is ``01'', the first jackpot game in which 5 round games are performed is executed, and when the stop special figure data is ``02'', 5 round games are performed. At the same time, the second jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game, and when the stop special figure data is "03" or "11", the round game is played ten times. is performed, a third big winning game is executed in which the state after the big winning game is more advantageous to the player than the first big winning game or the second big winning game.

In addition, when the stop special figure data is "12", the remaining five round games are performed via the small winning game which is the first round game, and after the big winning game is played more than the third big winning game. A fourth jackpot game is executed in which the state is disadvantageous to the player.

As a feature of the big winning opening control data determination table for the big winning game shown in FIG. When executing a jackpot game (fourth to fifth jackpot games) based on the above, the maximum round (10 rounds) jackpot game is more likely to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the game characteristics when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 and when the game ball wins in the second start port 47, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the large winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game contains the stop special figure data of the special symbol (kind of the small winning game) and the large winning opening to be opened in the small winning game. The maximum number of times of opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning mouth in the small winning game, the opening time until the big winning mouth is converted to the open state, the type of the big winning mouth to be opened, and for one opening The opening time of all the big winning mouths, the interval time when the big winning mouth is closed (the time required to discharge the game ball from the big winning mouth), and the small winning game from the last closing of the big winning mouth Ending time until completion is associated.

As a feature of the large winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game shown in FIG. It is set to the time during which the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 (0.82 second interval time for the firing interval of 0.67 second). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the opening time of the first large winning opening 50, and the first large winning opening is opened within the predetermined maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small winning game. It is possible to increase the number of openings of the winning openings and improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game includes the stop special figure data of the special symbol (kind of the small winning game) and the specific area 53 to be opened in the small winning game. The maximum number of times of opening, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53 are associated with each other.

In the small winning game, regardless of the kind of the small winning game, the specific area 53 is changed to the open state when the big winning opening is opened in the small winning game, and the specific area 53 is changed to the closed state when the big winning opening is closed.

As a characteristic of the specific area control data determination table for small winning game shown in FIG. The point is that the opening/closing timing of the specific region 53 is set so that the specific region 53 is passed through at . By doing so, the player can complete the small winning game with peace of mind, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that wins the first big prize hole 50 during the small winning game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1), it is 50% The specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

In addition, a plurality of types of small winning games are provided, and depending on the type of small winning game, a game ball that has won the first big winning opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1). When opening and closing 53 (for example, a second small winning game), the specific area 53 is opened and closed so that the game ball that has won the first big winning hole 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of 25% (1/4). A case (for example, a third small winning game) may be provided.

(Jackpot game processing on the main control board)
The jackpot game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the jackpot game processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the set opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing is "0" or more. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S340-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the above special symbol stop processing has passed. When the opening time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-3, and when the opening time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c, and a round flag indicating that the round game is in progress is set in the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games played (R) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, the round specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the round effect corresponding to the current round game is performed.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-round flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If the round game is being played, the process moves to step S340-6, and if the round game is not being played, the process moves to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time elapsed from the start of the current round game has reached the opening timing of the big winning opening specified by the control data of the big winning game. If the conditions for opening the big winning opening are satisfied, the process moves to step S340-7, and if the opening conditions for the big winning opening are not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-8.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the type of the big winning opening to be opened from the control data of the jackpot game (first big winning opening 50 or second big winning opening 56), and the big winning opening this time (first big winning opening 50 or The opening time of the second big winning opening 56) is specified, and the opening time of the big winning opening and the driving data of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid (first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are set as the main It is set in the RAM 110c. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening of the current big winning opening is before the final opening in the current round game and the opening time has passed. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-9, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-10.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 50 or second big winning opening 56) is specified from the control data of the big winning game, and the interval time (closing time) of the big winning opening is specified. time) is set in the main RAM 110c, and the drive data for the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid set in the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the conditions for shifting to the interval are satisfied. Specifically, the number of game balls that have won the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth 50 or second big winning mouth 56) in this round game has reached the maximum winning number, or the number of big winning mouths in this round game It is determined whether or not the opening time of the final opening has passed. When the condition for shifting to the interval is established, the process is moved to step S340-11, and when the condition for shifting to the interval is not established, the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, the current interval time (closing time of the big winning opening) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, the interval time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the big winning set in the main RAM 110c is set. Clear the driving data of the solenoid. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state. Also, instead of the in-round flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an in-interval flag indicating that the interval is in progress is set. When the interval shift processing ends, the current jackpot game processing ends.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the interval is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is during the interval, the process moves to step S340-13, and if it is not during the interval, the process moves to step S340-19.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed in step S340-13. When the interval time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-14, and when the interval time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round game in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round game has ended, the process moves to step S340-17, and if the final round game has not ended, the process moves to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-15. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, instead of the interval flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, the round game flag is set.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games played (R) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, the round specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the round effect corresponding to the current round game is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, instead of the interval flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an ending flag indicating that the game is ending is set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating the ending of the jackpot game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the jackpot game processing of this time. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for executing the ending effect corresponding to the big winning game or the small winning game of this time is performed.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is during the ending, the process is moved to step S340-20, and if it is not during the ending, this jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-20 whether or not the ending time has passed. If the ending time has not passed, this jackpot game process is terminated, and if the ending time has passed, in step S340-21, special figure special electric processing data for moving the process to the jackpot game end process is set to "5", and the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

(Small winning game processing of the main control board)
The small winning game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing small winning game end processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is "0" or more. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S350-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the above special symbol stop processing has passed. When the opening time has passed, in step S350-3, an opening/closing game flag indicating that the opening/closing game for opening/closing the big winning opening is in progress is set in the main RAM 110c, and when the opening time has not passed. , ends the small winning game processing of this time.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening/closing game of the big winning opening is in progress. If the opening/closing game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-5, and if the opening/closing game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big winning slot is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening of the small winning game or the interval has ended. If the condition for opening the big winning opening is met, the process moves to step S350-6, and if the opening condition for the big winning opening is not met, the process moves to step S350-7.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the type of large winning opening to be opened from the control data of the small winning game shown in FIG. 28 (b) (first large winning opening 50 or second large winning opening 56) The opening time of the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56) is specified, and the opening time of the big winning hole and the big winning hole opening/closing solenoid (first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b or second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b) is set in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. If the condition for opening the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-8, and if the condition for opening the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area release processing in step S350-8. Specifically, the driving data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted to the open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for closing the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. If the condition for closing the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-10, and if the condition for closing the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area closing processing in step S350-10. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted to the closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has passed, and whether or not the number of winnings to the large winning opening has reached the maximum number of winnings. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process is moved to step S350-12, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process is moved to step S350-13.

In step S350-12, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) is specified from the control data of the small winning game shown in FIG. Clear the drive data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final interval time in the small winning game has elapsed. When the final interval time has passed, in step S350-14, the opening/closing game flag set in the main RAM 110c is cleared, and when the final interval time has not passed, the small winning game of this time End the process.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the specific area passing flag is saved in the main RAM 110c. When the specific area passage flag is saved, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the open/close game, and the process is shifted to step S350-16 assuming that the jackpot game is executed, and the specific area passage flag is saved. If not, the process proceeds to step S350-19 assuming that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the open/close game to execute the ending.

The main CPU 110a clears the specific area passage flag saved in the main RAM 110c in step S350-16, and performs jackpot game transition processing in step S350-17. Specifically, control data (maximum number of round games, maximum winning number, opening time, etc.), and the time saving flag saved in the main RAM 110c and the remaining number of times of each time saving (remaining number of times saving special figure (J), remaining number of times saving small hit (Z), remaining number of times saving normal figure (G)) is cleared to terminate the time-saving game state and perform processing such as shifting to the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state).

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" in order to shift the processing to the big winning game processing, and ends the current small winning game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the small winning game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending specifying command indicating the ending of the small winning game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small winning game processing. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the game ball is placed in the specific area 53 in the ending effect (during the small winning game, more specifically during the opening and closing game) according to the small winning game this time. A disappointing notification effect, etc., for notifying that the road did not pass through) is executed.

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 is "0" or more. If it is during the ending, the process is moved to step S350-22, and if it is not during the ending, this small winning game process is terminated.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 has elapsed. When the ending time has not passed, the small hit game process of this time is terminated, and when the ending time has passed, in step S350-23, a special figure special electric call is sent to move the process to the special symbol storage determination process. After setting "0" to the processing data, the current small winning game processing is terminated.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the small winning game (conversion game) ends (10 times opening of the first big winning opening or winning of 10 game balls) The jackpot game is not executed until the game is played. Therefore, the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 does not put the player at a disadvantage, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the big winning game is executed without ending the small winning game. Therefore, the period from the small win game to the big win game is not prolonged, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, you may make it perform a big-hit game after performing the ending of a small-hit game.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 110a acquires stop special figure data saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-2, determines whether or not the stop special figure data is a jackpot special symbol. If it is a big hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S360-3, and if it is not a big hit special symbol (it is a small hit special symbol), the process is moved to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the game state information when winning the jackpot saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-4, sets the game state after the jackpot game based on the game state information when winning the jackpot. Select the first game state setting table (see FIG. 30(a)) for playing, and move the process to step S360-7. The details of the first game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the specific area passing game state information saved in the main RAM 110c. is selected (see FIG. 30(b)), and the process proceeds to step S360-7. The details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a collates the acquired game state information and the like with the selected game state setting table, and sets the game state flags (normal flag, first time reduction flag, second time reduction flag) as the game state after the jackpot game. flag), each remaining number of time reduction (remaining number of time reduction special figure (J), remaining number of time reduction per small (Z), remaining number of time reduction general figure (G)) is determined and set in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8 , a game state designation command corresponding to the game state flag is set in the performance transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the game state is performed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing, and terminates the current jackpot game ending processing.

Thus, at the end of the big winning game executed by the game ball passing through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, based on the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, It is possible to perform a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the jackpot game (game state, time saving number of times, small winning remaining number of times), or setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 110c). It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to perform game control (setting of game conditions) by making use of events that actually occur in the game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Also, at the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the jackpot game, based on the game state when it is determined to be a jackpot, a predetermined process (specifically, the game conditions after the jackpot game (game state, time saving number, small It is possible to perform a process of determining the remaining number of hits) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 110c. Therefore, the game performance can be differentiated depending on whether it is a big winning game via a small winning game or a big winning game not via a small winning game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

At the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the small hit game, a predetermined process is not performed based on the game state when it is determined to be a jackpot, but based on the game state when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. Predetermined processing may be performed.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing a first game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the small hit, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a second game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), the game state setting table includes stop special symbol data of special jackpot symbols, game state information at the time of jackpot winning indicating the game state at the time of jackpot winning, and setting. A game state flag (normal flag indicating that it is a normal game state, a first time saving flag indicating that it is a first time saving game state, a second time saving flag indicating that it is a second time saving game state) and a time saving Time-saving special figure remaining number of times (J), which is the number of times of variable display of special symbols to end the game state, time-saving small winning number of times (G), which is the number of small winning games to end the time-saving gaming state, and time-saving gaming state is associated with the remaining number of time-saving normal patterns (G), which is the number of times of variable display of the normal patterns that end the .

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is a jackpot game (first jackpot game) that does not enter a time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, and a jackpot game (second to fourth jackpots) that is in a time-saving game state. game) is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the type of jackpot game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. The point is that there is a jackpot game (second jackpot game, third jackpot game, fourth jackpot game) in which the number of remaining time-saving small hits (Z) increases. By doing so, it is possible to vary the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) set according to the type of the big win game, thereby improving the game performance and enhancing the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. The point is that there is a jackpot game (fourth jackpot game) in which the number of remaining time-saving general patterns (G) increases. By doing so, it is possible to vary the remaining number of time-saving general patterns (G) set according to the type of the jackpot game, thereby improving the game performance and enhancing the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30, in the time-saving game state, the number of times the normal symbol changes (the number of occurrences of the first game event) is a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times, in other words, G= 0), the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (the number of occurrences of the second game event) has reached a predetermined number of times (5 times, in other words J = 0), and the small amount determined to execute the small winning game It is possible to terminate the time-saving game state based on the number of hit determinations (the number of occurrences of the third game event) reaching a predetermined number of times (Z=0). By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to when the time-saving game state will end, and to select the type of small winning game (type of big winning game) directly connected to the big winning game. It is possible to suppress the act of impairing the fair game of trying to execute the jackpot game with , and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30, the time saving game state is set more than the normal symbol fluctuation count (the number of occurrences of the first game event = 50 times or 100 times) to end the time saving game state. The point is that the number of variations of special symbols to be terminated (the number of occurrences of the second game event=5 times) is set smaller. By doing so, the player executes the variable display of the normal symbols rather than the variable display of the special symbols so that the time-saving game state does not end early, and the novelty of the time-saving game state that has never existed before. can be provided, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol that ends the time saving game state (the number of occurrences of the second game event = 5 times) is reserved memory (first reserved memory, Second reserved storage) is larger than the upper limit storage number "4". By doing so, the first reservation memory (U1) that may remain when the normal game state shifts to the time saving game state is digested, and the time saving game state ends early. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of losing the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, although there is only one type of time-saving special symbol remaining number of times, which is the number of times of variable display of special symbols to end the time-saving gaming state, for example, 1 hour-shortening, which is the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol to end the time-saving gaming state A special figure remaining number (J1) and a second special figure remaining number (J2) that is the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special symbol that ends the time saving game state may be provided, and the time saving game state is ended. A third time-saving special symbol remaining number (J3), which is the number of times of variable display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, may be provided. Even in this case, each time-saving special figure remaining number of times J1 ~ J3 may be a smaller value than the time-saving normal figure remaining number of times.

In addition, when the jackpot game (first to third jackpot games) that does not go through the small hit game is executed, the game state before the jackpot game is executed (regular game state or time saving game state) When the number of times of variable display of special symbols that ends the time-saving game state regardless (remaining number of time-saving special symbols) does not change, and the jackpot game (1st V to 3rd V jackpot game) via the small game is executed Alternatively, the number of times of variable display of special symbols (second number of times of time saving) for ending the normal time saving game state may be changed depending on the game state before execution of the jackpot game.

In addition, a time saving game state may be generated after all the big winning games are finished, or a plurality of big winning games via the small winning games are provided in relation to providing a plurality of small winning games, and the first small winning game is played. After the jackpot game via , the time saving game state is not generated, and after the jackpot game via the second small winning game is finished, the time saving game state may be generated.

(Game state referred to at the end of the jackpot game not via the jackpot game)
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of a big win game that does not go through a small win game, and FIG. 31(a) is a timing chart when the big win variation display is executed in the normal game state. , FIG. 31(b) is a timing chart when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time saving gaming state (before the final variation: the number of remaining time saving special figures (J)>0), and FIG. 31(c) is a time saving It is a timing chart when the big hit variation display is executed in the game state (final variation: time saving special figure remaining number (J) = 0).

Regarding the game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number of times, remaining number of small hits) at the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the jackpot game, the timing when it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot judgment (when the jackpot is won ).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the T4 jackpot game, at the start of the T1 jackpot variation display, that is, when the jackpot is won. The game conditions (game state, various time saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state in . In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the big hit fluctuation display is executed in the time saving game state (before the final change: the number of time saving special figures remaining (J)>0), at the end of the T4 jackpot game, The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, remaining number of small wins) are set with reference to the game state at the start of the big win variation display at T1, that is, at the timing of winning the big win. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 31(c), when the big hit variation display is executed in the time saving game state (final change: time saving special figure remaining number (J) = 0), at the end of the T4 big win game, T1 At the start of the big hit variation display, that is, the game condition (game state, various times of time reduction, remaining number of small wins) is set with reference to the game state at the timing of winning the big win. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

(Game state referred to at the end of the jackpot game via the small win game)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of the jackpot game via the small win game, and FIG. 32(a) is a timing chart when the small hit variation display is executed in the normal game state. There is, FIG. 32 (b) is a timing chart when the time saving end condition is not established in the time saving game state (remaining number of time saving small hits (Z)>0) small hit fluctuation display is executed, FIG. 32 (c) ) is a timing chart when the time-saving end condition is established in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving small-time remaining number of times (Z)=0) and small-hit variation display is executed.

Regarding the game state referred to in order to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) at the end of the jackpot game via the small win game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small win game. It is the timing (at the time of transition to the jackpot game) when it is done.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the small winning variation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the T6 big winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the T4 small winning game. The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state at the time of doing. In this case, since the normal game state is maintained from the start of the small winning variation display, the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the time saving end condition is not established in the time saving game state (remaining number of time saving small hits (Z)>0) When the small hit fluctuation display is executed, the end of the T6 jackpot game At the time, the game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, remaining number of small hits) are set with reference to the game state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53 during the small hit game of T4. In this case, since the time-saving game state is maintained without the various time-saving times and the remaining number of small wins becoming "0" when the small hit variation display is stopped and displayed at T2, the timing of T4 is called the time-saving game state. It will be. When the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the jackpot game is started and the normal game state is entered. It is supposed to be.

As shown in FIG. 32 (c), when the time saving end condition is established in the time saving game state (remaining number of time saving small hits (Z) = 0) small hit fluctuation display is executed, the end of T6 jackpot game At the time, the game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, remaining number of small hits) are set with reference to the game state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53 during the small hit game of T4. In this case, at the time of the stop display of the small winning variation display at T2, one of the time saving times becomes "0" and the time saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state, so the timing of T4 is called the normal game state. It will be.

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, when the big winning variation display is executed and the big winning game is executed, and when the small winning variation display is executed and the big winning game is executed, at the end of the big winning game The sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the game state to be referred to for setting the game conditions (game state, various times of time saving, number of remaining small hits) is different. Therefore, it is possible to make the game different depending on whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Public power control processing of the main control board)
Using FIG. 33, the normal/universal power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the normal/universal power control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general electric power processing data, and in step S402, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded general electric power processing data, and executes the processing corresponding to the branch destination address. Execute and end the current general map general electric control processing.

Specifically, if the general pattern general electric processing data = 0, the processing for executing the variable display of the normal pattern based on the reservation memory (normal pattern determination information) and the general pattern general electric processing data "1" A normal symbol variation process (step S410) for performing the process of changing to , etc. is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later.

If the general pattern general electric processing data = 1, the processing for executing the auxiliary game to open the second start port 47 in a predetermined manner and the processing for changing the general general electric processing data to "0", etc. The auxiliary game process (step S420) is executed.

(Normal pattern variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. When the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S410-19, and when the normal symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the general pattern reservation memory (F) is 1 or more. When the general pattern reservation memory (F) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S410-3, and when the general pattern reservation memory (F) is not 1 or more, this normal pattern variation processing is ended.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates the general pattern reservation storage (F) by subtracting "1", and in step S410-4, the general pattern corresponding to the number of the general pattern reservation storage (F) after subtraction. A pending number designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the command for specifying the number of reserved patterns is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the image display device displays the reserved display corresponding to the reserved storage (F) (display of the reserved icon for reserved patterns, display of the number of reserved patterns for normal patterns, display of the number of reserved patterns) ) will be performed.

In step S410-5, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, the game state grasped by the performance control board 130 is updated, or the performance corresponding to the updated game state is performed.

In step S410-6, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units to the previous one. shift to the

For example, the normal pattern determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. In addition, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The normal pattern determination information used in the previous game is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-7. Specifically, using the hit determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 35 (a)), whether or not hit based on the random number value for hit determination stored in the game state and normal pattern execution storage area decide. The details of the hit determination table for normal symbol determination will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-8. Specifically, using the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 35(b)), based on the game state, the hit determination result, and the random number value for normal symbol determination, the normal that is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display Determine the stop normal pattern data of the design. Details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the normal symbol type determined in the normal symbol determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the stop normal pattern data can be grasped in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a performs a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, using the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 35 (c) or FIG. 35 (d)) according to the game state, the game state, the hit determination result, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern random number value Then, a variation pattern (variation time) for variably displaying the normal symbols is determined. In addition, the detail of a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table is mentioned later.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a sets a normal pattern variation pattern designation command corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern determined in the normal pattern variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the general pattern variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the general pattern variation pattern can be grasped in the production control board 130.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the normal pattern variation time corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern determined in the normal pattern variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-13, normal The symbol variation display is started, and the normal symbol variation processing of this time is terminated. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the normal symbols is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and is output in the output control process of the step S800, so that the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device 62. will be displayed.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a time saving flag (one of the first time saving flag, second time saving flag, and third time saving flag) is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time saving flag is set, the process moves to step S410-15 as updating the time saving normal figure remaining number (G), and if the time saving flag is not set, the time saving normal figure remaining number ( G) is not updated, and this normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the remaining number of time-saving normal patterns (G), which is the number of time-saving normal patterns saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S420-16, the remaining number of time-saving normal patterns. It is determined whether (G) has become "0". When the time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G) becomes "0", the process is shifted to step S410-17 assuming that the time-saving game state is terminated, and the time-saving general figure remaining number of times (G) becomes "0". If not, the process proceeds to step S410-18, assuming that the condition for ending the time-saving gaming state is not met.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a clears the time-saving flag and each remaining time-saving number of times (time-saving special figure remaining number of times (J), time-saving small winning number of times remaining (Z), time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G)) from the main RAM 110c. Then, the time-saving game state is ended, the game state is shifted to the normal game state, and the current normal symbol variation processing is ended.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets, in the electric device data storage area for performance, a command for specifying the number of times of reduction in time corresponding to the number of times of reduction in normal time remaining (G), which is the number of times of reduction in time remaining in the normal pattern. As a result, the command for specifying the number of times of shortening of working hours is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of times of shortening of working hours remaining in the normal design can be grasped by the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When this processing is finished, the normal symbol variation processing of this time is finished.

In step S410-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. When the variation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated, and when the variation time has elapsed, the variation display of the normal symbols is stopped in step S410-20, and in step S410-21. , set the normal symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In step S410-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (hitting winning). If it is not a winning normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is terminated, and if it is a winning normal symbol, in step S410-23, the auxiliary game is controlled from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 37 (f)). Acquire the auxiliary game control data for doing. The details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-24, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the opening of the auxiliary game is started in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

The main CPU110a, in step S410-25, sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in step S410-23 in a predetermined area of the main RAM110c, and in step S410-26, to the general figure general electric processing data "1" is set, and this time's normal symbol variation processing is terminated.

In this way, when the time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G) becomes "0" during the time-saving game state, even if the time-saving special figure remaining number of times (J) and the time-saving small winning number of times (Z) remain Also, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game property in which the time-saving game state ends with the number of executions of the variable display of normal symbols in which the judgment of the big hit is not performed, rather than the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbols in which the judgment of the big hit is performed. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the time-saving normal pattern remaining number of times (G) becomes "0" during the time-saving game state and ends the time-saving game state, when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed after the normal pattern fluctuation time has passed, or the stop time The time-saving game state is ended when the variation display of normal symbols is started (immediately after the start), not when the time has elapsed. Therefore, regardless of the variation time of the normal symbols, the time-saving game state can be ended at a timing that is easy for the player to grasp, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, even when the variable display of normal symbols is executed, the game state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 in the same manner as when the variable display of the special symbols is executed. It has become. Therefore, when the time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G) becomes "0", when the time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state, the game state is notified to the production control board 130, so that the game state is controlled according to the game state. An effect can be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, it is a normal game state in which the normal pattern fluctuation performance with the variable display of the production pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern is not executed, or the variable display of the production pattern 70a is accompanied with the variable display of the normal pattern. Regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state in which the normal pattern fluctuation effect is executed, when the normal pattern variable display is executed, the command related to the normal pattern variable display (normal pattern designation command, general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols is executed in the effect control board 130, and it is possible to execute the effect (for example, variable display of special symbols TZ) according to the variable display of normal symbols. becomes.

In addition, when the time saving special symbol remaining number (J) becomes "0" during the time saving game state and ends the time saving game state, when the special symbol fluctuation time has passed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed Although it is designed to end the time-saving game state, even when the time-saving normal pattern remaining number of times (G) becomes "0" and the time-saving game state is ended, the normal pattern fluctuation time has passed and the normal pattern The time-saving game state may be ended when is stop-displayed, or the time-saving game state may be ended when the stop time of the normal symbols has passed.

In addition, the game state designation command is transmitted before updating the time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G), but after updating the time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G), that is, after the game state changes You may make it transmit a game state designation|designated command by .

In addition, as a command for specifying the number of times of working hours, a command indicating the remaining number of times of working hours (G) is sent. It is also possible to transmit a command including the remaining number of times (Z) for short and small wins.

In this way, the number of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (game state designation command, normal design designation command, normal pattern fluctuation pattern Specified command), the number of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 when the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the time saving game state (game state designation command, normal design designation command, normal design Fluctuation pattern specification command, time saving number specification command) are increasing. Therefore, the production control board 130 can appropriately grasp the remaining number of times of time saving, and it is possible to perform processing such as notifying the number of remaining times of saving time.

(Hit determination table for normal symbols)
FIG. 35(a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referred to when determining hit based on the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), in the hit determination table for normal symbols, the game state at the time of performing hit determination, the random number for hit determination, and the determination result of hit determination (hit, lose) correspond to each other. As a reference, the approximate winning probability is described in the rightmost column.

"Hit" is the determination result that the auxiliary game is executed, and "losing" is the determination result that the auxiliary game is not executed.

The first feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 35(a) is that the probability (percentage) of hit determination is the same regardless of the game state. By doing so, it is possible to expect that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the probability (proportion) that the time-saving game state is determined to be hit is higher than the normal game state (generates the normal pattern probability variation).

(Normal design judgment table)
FIG. 35(b) is a normal symbol determination table referred to when determining a normal symbol stop symbol based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35(b), in the normal symbol determination table, the game state when the determination is performed, the determination result of the hit determination (hit, lose), the random number for the hit symbol determination, and the normal symbol determination. The determination result, the stop normal pattern data indicating the determination result, and the normal design specifying command indicating the result of the normal design determination are associated with each other.

The normal symbol "0" is a losing normal symbol in which the auxiliary game is not executed.
The normal symbol "1" and the normal symbol "2" are an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is short-opened once at a time value that makes it difficult for the game ball to win (almost no win, no win at all) depending on the game state, or , The second starting port 47 is a hit normal pattern in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start port 47 is long open twice with a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to win.
The normal symbol "3" is a winning normal symbol in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is long opened twice with a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to win regardless of the game state.

A first feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 35(b) is that the number of types of normal symbols to be stop-displayed differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to vary the game characteristics related to the normal symbols depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, it is good also as the same kind of normal symbol to be stopped and displayed in the normal game state and the time-saving game state. In this case, so that the normal game state is more disadvantageous than the time-saving game state, for example, even when the normal symbol 2 and the normal symbol 3 are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed in the same manner as the normal symbol 1. It is better to

(Normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 35(c) is a normal pattern variation pattern determination table for normal reference when determining the variation pattern of normal symbols in the normal game state, and FIG. It is a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving to be referred to when determining a fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d), the normal pattern variation pattern determination table contains the game state, the determination result of the hit determination, the type of normal pattern, the normal pattern variation pattern random number value, The type of normal pattern fluctuation pattern that is the determination result is associated with the fluctuation time of each normal pattern fluctuation pattern, and the production content and the average fluctuation time are described as a reference.

As the production contents shown in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. It means that a variable effect of stopping and displaying with scattered losing results is executed.

"Chance fluctuation" is an effect suggesting that it is a chance to win when the three production patterns 70a are displayed fluctuating at high speed (an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is opened for a long time is executed), Specifically, the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an operation effect that notifies the determination result according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period (in the case of winning, the first movable member 73a After descending to , stop display is performed in a state in which the three performance symbols are aligned, and in the case of loss, the first movable member 73a does not operate and the three performance symbols form a ready-to-win failure. It means that the variable production to be performed is executed.

"Loss camouflage variation" is caused by execution of an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 short-opens at a time value that makes it difficult for the game ball to win (substantially does not win) despite the win. This means that the three performance symbols 70a fluctuate at a high speed and a variable performance is executed in which the three performance symbols 70a do not become a ready-to-win game and are stopped and displayed with disparate losing numbers.

In addition, when the time-saving normal pattern remaining number (G) is "0" and the time-saving game state is terminated, the normal pattern fluctuation display is lost, and when the game ball is difficult to win in the second start port 47 In the case of a hit that opens in a short opening pattern (which does not substantially win a prize), a series of advantageous intervals that are advantageous to the player A result display indicating the result of the game (the number of consecutive games in the jackpot game, the number of balls, etc.) during the period in which the state continues is displayed.

As the first feature of the normal pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d), the variation effect by the effect symbol 70a is not executed during the variable display of the normal symbol (the auxiliary game is executed Also, the second starting port 47 does not open long) In the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the same regardless of whether it is a loss or a hit. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data for performing the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal game state, and it is possible to efficiently control the variable display of the normal symbols. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of anticipation, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a second feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. When the auxiliary game to be released is executed, the three performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed separately to disguise the loss, thereby executing a loss camouflage variation. By doing so, when an auxiliary game in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47 (substantially does not win a prize) is executed, the player will not be expected to win, and the interest in the game will be improved. can be improved.

As the third feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. In some cases, chance variation is executed with the operation of the effect button 17 by the player (occurrence of valid period). By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the fourth feature of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d), the game ball is difficult to win in the second start port 47 in the time saving game state (substantially does not win) When the auxiliary game of short opening with a time value is executed, a performance suggesting that the result is unfavorable to the player (3 performance symbols 70a are stop-displayed with disparate losing numbers). is executed, the second starting port 47 is executed for a long time with a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to win (almost wins a prize). A suggestive effect (chance variation that is stop-displayed in a state in which three effect symbols 70a are aligned) is executed. By doing so, when the auxiliary game in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 is executed, and when the auxiliary game in which the game ball is easy to enter the second starting port 47 is executed. It becomes easy to distinguish the situation from the situation, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifth feature of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. A combination of performance symbols stopped and displayed when an auxiliary game for short opening with a time value is executed (three performance symbols 70a are disjointed), and a second start port 47 facilitates the winning of game balls. It is different from the combination of performance symbols (hitting number in which three performance symbols 70a are aligned) that is stop-displayed when an auxiliary game that opens long with a time value of 0 (almost winning a prize) is executed. points. By doing so, when the auxiliary game in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 is executed, and when the auxiliary game in which the game ball is easy to enter the second starting port 47 is executed. It becomes easy to distinguish the situation from the situation, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Variable display of normal symbols (variable performance) can be executed with a time value longer than the time value (5 seconds), but the average variation time of the variable display of normal symbols is the average variation of the variable display of normal symbols in the normal game state. The point is that it is shorter than the time. By doing so, it becomes easier to arouse the expectation of the player in the time-saving game state, and the variable display of the normal symbols can be executed in a manner more advantageous to the player in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the normal pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that the average variation time of normal symbols differs depending on the type of time-saving gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to bring out the characteristics of each time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is easier to determine in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state. points. By doing so, it is possible to provide characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the ninth feature of the general pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d), when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, the establishment of the predetermined condition (RWM clear, end of the jackpot game) While it is possible to switch the special symbol variation pattern determination table when the number of variations of the special symbol executed from reaches a predetermined number, when determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol during the normal game state or the time saving game state , The point is that the switching of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table is restricted. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of the control when executing the variable display of the normal symbols. In addition, while the variable display of special symbols directly linked to the big win can be enhanced, the variable display of the ordinary symbols not directly linked to the big win can be made simple and easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved. .

As the tenth feature of the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d), the general pattern fluctuation pattern for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern in the normal game state and the time saving game state Another point is that the determination table can be switched. By doing so, the normal game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened only in the short opening pattern in which the game ball is difficult to win (substantially does not win), and the long opening pattern in which the second starting port 47 is easy to win It is possible to achieve differentiation from the time-saving game state that can be opened at , and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh feature of the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The number of types of variation patterns (two types) of normal symbols used for the loss variation display of normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state is more than the number of types of variation patterns (each one type). By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state in which the variable display of normal symbols is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the twelfth feature of the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The average variation time by the variation pattern of the normal design used for the loss variation display of the normal design in the time saving game state is longer than the average variation time by the variation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state in which the variable display of normal symbols is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the thirteenth feature of the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d), in the time saving game state, the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern used for the second special symbol jackpot fluctuation display There are more types (three types) of normal symbol variation patterns used for the normal symbol hit variation display in the time-saving gaming state than the number (each one type). By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state in which the variable display of normal symbols is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the auxiliary game is executed in which the game ball is short-released at a time value that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 (substantially does not win a prize), the chance effect is not executed. However, the chance production may be executed. In this case, the chance production is executed at a rate different from the case where the auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is long opened with a time value at which the game ball is easy to win in the case of a loss or a win. do it. Specifically, the chance effect may be executed at a lower rate than in the case of a loss, or the second start port 47 may win a game ball at a higher rate than in the case of a loss. The chance performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the auxiliary game of long opening is executed with a time value that is easy to enter.

In addition, although there is only one type of chance performance, a plurality of types may be provided with different operation modes of the performance button 17, and in the case of the first chance performance, whether the performance button 17 is single-hit during the effective period. In the case of the second chance performance, the performance button 17 is hit a predetermined number of times during the effective period, or the determination result is notified when the effective period elapses. The ratio of execution of the first chance performance and the execution of the second chance performance when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened for a long time with a time value at which the game ball is easy to win. (For example, the second chance effect is more likely to be executed than the first chance effect, or vice versa).

In addition, in the chance production, the production pattern 70a does not form a ready-to-win state, but it is possible to execute an operation production (determined production) to generate a valid period in a state in which the ready-to-win state is formed. A reach variation effect may be performed separately from the effect. In this case, if it is a loss, if it is a hit and the auxiliary game is executed in which the game ball is short-released at a time value that makes it difficult to enter the game ball in the second start port 47 (substantially does not win), and if it is a win. The execution ratio of the ready-to-win variation effect may be made different between the case where the auxiliary game in which the game ball is opened for a long time at the time value at which the game ball is easily won in the second starting port 47 is executed. Specifically, rather than losing, it is better to execute an auxiliary game in which a short release is performed at a time value that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 47 (substantially does not win). , The reach variation effect may be executed at a low rate, or it is a hit and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 47 (substantially does not win) than in the case of loss. When the auxiliary game of short opening is executed, the ratio is higher than when the auxiliary game of long opening is executed with a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 47 as a win. Also, when the auxiliary game is executed in which short opening is performed at a time value in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 47 (substantially does not enter), the reach variation effect is executed at a lower rate. You may make it

In addition, regardless of the type of time-saving gaming state, the same normal figure variation pattern determination table for time saving is used to determine the normal figure variation pattern, but a separate normal figure variation pattern determination table for each type of time-saving gaming state may be provided to determine the normal figure fluctuation pattern, or a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) via a jackpot game and a time-saving game state (third A separate normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table may be provided for the time saving game state) to determine the normal figure fluctuation pattern, or a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving may be provided for each type of time saving game state. You may make it determine a normal figure fluctuation pattern.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 35(e) is an auxiliary game control table used for controlling the auxiliary game based on the type of winning normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 35(e), the auxiliary game control table includes the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop normal diagram data, the number of openings of the second start port 47, and the opening time of the auxiliary game. , The first opening time of the second starting port 47, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the second starting port 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated. The long opening ratio of the 2 starting port 47 is described.

For example, in the first time-saving game state, if the stop normal pattern data is "01", the number of times the second start port 47 is opened is one, and it is difficult to win a game ball (substantially winning a prize No) When an auxiliary game that short-opens for 0.07 seconds is executed and the stop normal pattern data is "03", the number of openings of the second start port 47 is two times, and the game ball wins. A long release auxiliary game is executed over an easy 3 seconds (6 seconds in total).

As the first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e), when the auxiliary game is executed in the normal game state, it is difficult for the game ball to win the second start port 47 (substantially does not win ) Only the auxiliary game that is short-opened with a time value is executed, and when the auxiliary game is executed in the time-saving game state, the auxiliary game that is long-opened with a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to win at the second start port 47 is executable. By doing so, basically the game ball does not enter the second start port 47 in the normal game state, and the game ball can enter the second start port 47 in the time saving game state, so the game state It is possible to vary the game characteristics depending on, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35 (e), the auxiliary game is opened with a time value (long opening pattern) where the game ball is easy to win in the second start port 47 depending on the type of the time saving game state is executed, that is, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the big winning game via the small winning game is executed is different. By doing so, it is possible to vary the game characteristics depending on the type of the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e), the first time-reduction game state and second time-reduction game state that pass through the jackpot game, and the third time-reduction game state that does not go through the jackpot game, The probability (percentage) of executing the auxiliary game in which the game ball is released at the time value (long release pattern) at which the game ball is easily won in the second start port 47 is different, that is, the game ball is won in the second start port 47. The point is that the probability of executing a big winning game via a small winning is different. By doing so, it is possible to vary the playability of the time-saving game state depending on whether or not the jackpot game is passed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e), even if the same winning normal symbol (for example, normal symbol 01), the game ball is placed in the second start port 47 depending on the type of the time-saving game state. When an auxiliary game is executed in which a short opening is performed with a time value that makes it difficult to win (substantially does not win), and an auxiliary game in which the game ball is released at a time value that makes it easy to win (long opening pattern) in the second start port 47 is executed. By doing so, it is possible to realize a variety of game properties without extremely increasing the number of types of winning normal symbols, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e), regardless of the type of the time-saving game state, the game ball is opened at the time value (long opening pattern) at which the game ball is easy to win in the second start port 47 The point is that the normal pattern (normal pattern 03) is set when the auxiliary game is executed. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the types of winning normal symbols, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the normal pattern 02 and the normal pattern 03 are determined in the normal game state, and even in the normal game state, the time value (long An auxiliary game that is opened in an open pattern) is executed, that is, a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and a jackpot game via a small hit may be executed.

In addition, when an auxiliary game is executed in which the game ball is opened at the second starting port 47 with a time value (long opening pattern) that is easy to win, the second starting port 47 is opened twice. , Long opening may be performed for 6 seconds with one opening, Long opening may be performed more than twice for a total of 6 seconds, or the second starting port 47 may be opened multiple times (2 When opening, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is changed for each opening time (for example, if it is opened twice, the first time is 2 seconds and the second time is 4 seconds). , and vice versa).

In addition, when the auxiliary game is executed in which the game ball is difficult to win (substantially does not win) at the second start port 47 and the time value at which the game ball wins easily at the second start port 47 is executed. The opening time and ending time of the auxiliary game are the same as when the auxiliary game opened in the (long opening pattern) is executed, but the time value ( When an auxiliary game is executed in which the game ball is short-opened at a time value in which it is difficult for the game ball to win (substantially does not win) at the second start port 47 than when the auxiliary game opened in the long opening pattern) is executed. , the opening time and/or ending time of the auxiliary game may be shortened.

(Public figure advance judgment table)
FIG. 36 is a general pattern pre-determination table referred to when pre-determining (prefetching) the general pattern determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the general pattern gate.

Specifically, FIG. 36(a) is a normal normal pattern pre-determining table that is referred to when executing normal pattern pre-reading processing in the normal game state, and FIG. 36(b) is in the time saving game state. It is a general pattern pre-determination table for time saving to be referred to when executing the general pattern pre-reading process.

As shown in FIG. 36, the general pattern prior determination table contains the game state, the determination result of the hit determination, the determination result of the normal pattern (stop normal pattern data), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number value, and the determination result The normal map scheduled variation pattern and the look-ahead information corresponding to the normal map scheduled variation pattern are associated, and the production content is described as a reference.

Therefore, the "normal pattern scheduled fluctuation pattern" and "prefetch information" can be said to be able to specify at least the type of normal pattern, the judgment result of hit judgment, the type of normal pattern, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern to be executed. . In addition, although the details will be described later, since the auxiliary game is executed depending on the type of normal symbol, the type of auxiliary game (the auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 opens short, the auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 opens long ) can be identified.

(Customer waiting control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In step S450-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a big win game or a small win game is currently in progress. When the jackpot game or the small hit game is in progress, the process is moved to step S450-10, and when the jackpot game or the small hit game is not in progress, in step S450-2, whether or not the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. determine whether When the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display, the process is moved to step S450-10, and when the special symbol is not in a variable display, in step S450-3, the first reserved memory (U1) and the second reserved memory. (U2) and are both "0". If it is not "0", the process moves to step S450-10, and if it is "0", the process moves to step S450-4.

In step S450-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the process is moved to step S450-7 assuming that it is in a customer waiting state, and if it is not in the normal game state (it is a time-saving game state), in step S450-5, the normal symbol It is determined whether or not the variable display is in progress. When the variable display of the normal pattern is in progress, the process is shifted to step S450-10, and when the variable display of the normal pattern is not in progress, the normal pattern holding memory (F) is "0" in step S450-6. Determine whether or not there is If it is "0", it is assumed that there is a customer waiting state, and the process moves to step S450-7, and if it is not "0", the process moves to step S450-10.

In step S450-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a customer waiting state flag, the current customer waiting control process is terminated, and if there is no customer waiting state flag, the process proceeds to step S450-8.

In step S450-8, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current customer waiting control process ends. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a customer waiting effect for appealing to the player (customer waiting demo effect for prompting the player to play, operation of the cross key 19, etc.) A process for executing an adjustment guidance effect for guiding the adjustment operation of the sound volume or the amount of light, etc.) is performed.

When the customer waits in the normal game state, the adjustment guidance effect is executed after 5 seconds have passed, and the customer waiting demo effect is executed after 60 seconds have passed, but the time-saving game state is executed. In the case of the customer waiting state, after 5 seconds have passed, the adjustment guidance effect is executed, and after 120 seconds have passed, the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed.

In step S450-10, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and ends the current customer waiting control process.

In this way, in the normal game state, even if the variable display of normal patterns is executed or the number of normal pattern reservations is not "0", the customer is waiting for appealing to the player. It is possible to execute effects (customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play, adjustment guidance effect for guiding the adjustment operation of sound volume and light amount, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to carry out the waiting-for-customer effect at an appropriate timing in accordance with the game situation, and it is possible to exhibit the effect of appealing to the player as intended.

Also, in the case of the time-saving game state, if the variable display of normal patterns is executed, or if the number of normal pattern reservations is not "0", a customer waiting effect for appealing to the player (Customer waiting demonstration effect to encourage the player to play, adjustment guidance effect to guide the adjustment operation of volume and light intensity, etc.) is not executed, normal pattern fluctuation display is not executed, and normal pattern is held If the number is "0", the customer waiting effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a waiting-for-customer production at an appropriate timing that matches the game situation (a state in which the variable display of normal symbols, which is important in the time-saving game state, is not executed), and has the intended appealing effect to the player. It is possible to demonstrate

In addition, the execution of the customer waiting effect is restricted more when the customer waits during the time-saving game state than when the customer waits during the normal game state (customer waiting state). The time until the waiting demo effect is executed is getting longer). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the waiting for customers in accordance with the situation in which the player is likely to secure the gaming machine, i.e., the time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that even during the normal game state, when the variable display of the normal pattern or the number of normal pattern holding is not "0", the production during customer waiting may not be executed, and during the time saving game state , the performance during customer waiting may be prevented from being executed, or one of the adjustment guidance performance and the customer waiting demonstration performance may be prevented from being executed during the time saving game state.

In addition, during the normal game state, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed, the execution of the customer waiting effect is restricted, and in the time saving game state, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the production while waiting for customers.

(Timing chart when the time-saving game state occurs after the end of the jackpot game)
FIG. 38 is a timing chart when the time-saving game state occurs after the end of the jackpot game.

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of the special symbols to be a big hit is started. At this time, since it is in the normal game state, all information such as the normal medium payout number and normal medium out number for calculating the normal base value, and the total number of outs for setting the game section are aggregated (counted). It is running.

Next, at timing T2, variable display of winning normal symbols is started. This fluctuation display is performed in a normal pattern fluctuation pattern.

After that, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the special symbols is started, and at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time N (0.5 seconds for the big win) has passed, the big win game (opening) is started, and the right When the hitting indicator 67 lights up, output of a jackpot signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress and an advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal game state is started. In addition, the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal period for calculating the normal base value will be stopped, and the aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs for setting the game section will continue (normal base value calculation and display of normal base values).

Then, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state. Therefore, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 opens (short opening) in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to win (substantially does not win).

Further, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting port 47, and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol that is lost is started. Since this variation display was started during the jackpot game (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), it is performed in a normal pattern variation pattern.

Next, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, there is a temporary standby state, and at the timing of T10, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. be done. Since this variation display was started during the jackpot game (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), it is performed in a normal pattern variation pattern. Then, at the timing of T11, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state) is started, and the output of the jackpot signal is stopped.

In addition, at the timing of T12, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T13, when the stop time of the normal symbols passes, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is during the jackpot game (low probability) Since it was started during the time-saving game state), an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 opens (short opening) in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to win (substantially does not win).

Next, at the timing of T14, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting port 47, and the variable display of the winning normal symbols (first time in the time-saving game state) is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the time saving game state, it is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving.

After that, at the timing of T15, the stop display of normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T16, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the second start port 47 is difficult for the game ball to win. An auxiliary game to open (short open) with a short open pattern is executed. Then, at the timing of T17, when the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting port 47, the variable display of normal symbols (the second time in the time-saving game state) to be lost is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the time saving game state, it is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. In addition, at the timing of T18, stop display of normal symbols is started.

Here, an example in which the time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of the normal symbols is shown, but even if the time-saving game state occurs during the stop display of the normal symbols or during the auxiliary game, the next normal symbol It is performed with a normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving from fluctuation display.

In this way, when the time-saving game state occurs after the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving game state occurs after a predetermined period of time (after the end of the jackpot game) from the end of the stop display of the special symbol for the big win. It's like Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous during the jackpot game, and to secure the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side.

In addition, when the time-saving gaming state occurs after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined period before the time-saving gaming state occurs (the stop time of the jackpot special symbol has passed and the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving gaming state, is started. The right-hand hitting indicator 67 is turned on from time). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in connection with the occurrence of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the time-saving gaming state occurs after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined period before the time-saving gaming state occurs (the stop time of the jackpot special symbol has passed and the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving gaming state, is started. time), the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted). Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even during the period when the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal period for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended), the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value will not be possible. Since it is continued, it is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

Also, when the time-saving gaming state occurs after the end of the jackpot game, before a predetermined period of time when the time-saving gaming state occurs (at the start of the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving gaming state after the stop time of the jackpot special symbol has passed) , to output an advantageous state signal. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the outside.

In addition, when the time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, from the next normal symbol variation display to the normal symbol variation pattern for time-saving. is to be carried out. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of the normal symbols midway due to the occurrence of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, when the time saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the fluctuation display by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern for time saving is performed from the fluctuation display of the next normal pattern, and the opening pattern for time saving is performed from the next auxiliary game. , the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened is executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load without performing complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of the normal symbols and the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the time saving game state.

(Timing chart when the time saving special figure remaining number becomes 0 and the time saving game state ends)
FIG. 39 is a timing chart when the time saving special figure remaining number (J) becomes 0 and the time saving game state ends.

First, at the timing of T1, the loss variation display of the first special symbol, which is the final time in the time-saving gaming state, is started. At this time, since the game is in the time-saving game state, the right-handed display 67 is lit, and the advantageous state signal is output. In addition, since it is in a time-saving gaming state, while the information tallying (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended), it is necessary to set the game section Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs is performed.

Next, at timing T2, variable display of winning normal symbols is started. This fluctuation display is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started. An auxiliary game of opening (short opening) in a short opening pattern (substantially not winning) is executed.

After that, at the timing of T5, when the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting hole 47, the variable display of normal symbols that are lost is started. This fluctuation display is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T6, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, a temporary standby state is entered.

Next, at the timing of T8, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. This fluctuation display is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T9, when the stop display of the special symbols is started, the time-saving game state is terminated and the normal game state is started, the right-handed display 67 is extinguished, and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. be. In addition, since the normal game state is entered, totaling (counting) of the normal medium payout number and the normal medium out number for calculating the normal base value is resumed. In addition, stop display of normal symbols is started.

After that, at the timing of T10, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T11, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the short game state. Therefore, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern (long opening) in which the winning of game balls is easy. In addition, the right hitting indicator 67 lights up.

Then, at the timing of T12, when the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting port 47, the variation display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this variation display was started during the normal game state, it is performed in the normal pattern variation pattern. Also, the right-handed indicator 67 is turned off.

After that, at the timing of T13, when the special symbol stop time M (8.0 seconds at the end of the time saving) elapses, the loss variation display of the first special symbol, which is the first time in the normal game state, is started. Then, at the timing of T14, the stop display of the normal symbols is disclosed, and at the timing of T15, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state. Therefore, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 opens (short opening) in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to win (substantially does not win). Then, at the timing of T15, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting port 47.例文帳に追加

Here, an example in which the time-saving game state ends during the variable display of the normal symbols is shown, but even if the time-saving game state ends during the stop display of the normal symbols or during the auxiliary game, the next normal symbol From the fluctuation display, the fluctuation display by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is performed.

In addition, in the variable display of special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the time-saving game state (remaining time-saving special symbols = 0), the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the time-saving game state ends. The indicator 67 is extinguished and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped, and the totalization (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is restarted.

In this way, as a result of the variable display of special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the time-saving gaming state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, the remaining number of time-saving small hits ( Even if Z) or the remaining number of time-saving normal patterns (G) remains, the time-saving game state advantageous to the player ends. Therefore, the time-saving game state can be ended so as to secure the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the time-saving gaming state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, the time-saving gaming state ends and the right The strike indicator 67 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in connection with the end of the time-saving gaming state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the time saving game state (remaining number of time saving special symbols = 0), when the losing special design is stopped and displayed, the time saving game state ends and normal Aggregation (counting) of the normal medium payout number and the normal medium out number for calculating the base value is restarted. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the time-saving gaming state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, the time-saving gaming state ends and is advantageous. Output of the status signal is stopped. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the outside.

In addition, when the time-saving game state ends during the variable display of the normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the variable display by the normal pattern variation pattern from the next normal symbol variation display. is to be carried out. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of the normal symbols halfway due to the end of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, when the time saving game state ends during execution of the auxiliary game, the fluctuation display by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is performed from the next normal pattern fluctuation display, and the second start port 47 from the next auxiliary game. However, an auxiliary game that opens (short opening) with a short opening pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to win (substantially does not win) will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load without performing complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of the normal symbols and the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the time saving game state.

In addition, although the right-handed display 67 is turned off at the timing (timing of T9) when the time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state, the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes the hit started during the time-saving game state The lighting of the right hitting indicator 67 may be continued (delayed) until the auxiliary game executed as a result of is completed, and the right hitting indicator 67 may be extinguished at the timing when this auxiliary game is finished.

In addition, when the variation display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state is lost, the right-handed display 67 may be extinguished at the timing of shifting to the normal game state (timing of T9). Further, when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is short-opened as a result of the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state is executed, at the timing of shifting to the normal game state (timing of T9). When the auxiliary game in which the right-handed display 67 is extinguished and the second starting port 47 is opened for a long time as a result of the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state is executed, the timing at which the auxiliary game ends. , the right-handed indicator 67 may be extinguished.

In addition, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped at the timing (timing of T9) when the time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state, but the fluctuation display of the normal symbol that becomes the hit started during the time-saving game state. The output of the advantageous state signal may be continued (delayed) until the auxiliary game executed as a result of is completed, and the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing when the auxiliary game is completed.

In addition, when the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state is lost, the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing of shifting to the normal game state (timing of T9). Further, when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is short-opened as a result of the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state is executed, at the timing of shifting to the normal game state (timing of T9). When the auxiliary game in which the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped and the second starting port 47 is long opened as a result of the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time saving game state is executed, the timing at which the auxiliary game ends. , the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped.

(Timing chart when the small winning game starts the big winning game and the time-saving gaming state ends)
FIG. 40 is a timing chart when a big winning game is started from a small winning game and the time saving game state ends.

First, at the timing of T1, the 78th hit variation display of normal symbols is started in the time saving game state. This fluctuation display is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. At this time, since the game is in the time-saving game state, the right-handed display 67 is lit, and the advantageous state signal is output. In addition, since it is in a time-saving gaming state, while the information tallying (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended), it is necessary to set the game section Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs is performed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the stop display of normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T3, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the second start port 47 makes it easy for the game ball to win. An auxiliary game that opens (long open) with a long open pattern is executed. Then, at the timing of T4, when the game ball wins the second start port 47, the second special symbol small hit variation display (normal symbol variation display and auxiliary game are not executed multiple times during the variation display) A super-shortening variation that cannot stock the second reserve store is started.

After that, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the special symbols is started, and when the auxiliary game is finished, the variable display of the normal symbols (79th time in the time-saving game state) is started. This fluctuation display is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the small winning game is started. In addition, stop display of normal symbols is started.

Next, at the timing between the timing of T6 and the timing of T7, the game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 50 enters the specific area 53, and at the timing of T7, when the small winning game ends, the big winning game ( Opening) is started to enter a low-probability short-time gaming state, and the output of a jackpot signal is started. In addition, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, it will be in a standby state once.

Then, at the timing of T8, the variable display of normal symbols that are lost is started. Since this variation display was started during the jackpot game (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), it is performed in a normal pattern variation pattern. Then, at the timing of T9, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, a temporary standby state is entered.

After that, at the timing of T11, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this variation display was started during the jackpot game (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), it is performed in a normal pattern variation pattern. Then, at the timing of T12, stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T13, when the jackpot game (ending) is finished, the time-saving game state is started and the jackpot signal output is stopped. In addition, although the auxiliary game is started when the stop time of the normal design has passed, since the fluctuation display of the normal design is started during the jackpot game (low-probability short-time game state), the second start port 47 wins the game ball. An auxiliary game is executed to open (short open) in a short open pattern that is difficult to win (substantially does not win).

Next, at the timing of T14, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting port 47, and the variable display of normal symbols (first time in the time-saving game state) is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the time saving game state, it is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T15, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T16, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, a temporary standby state is entered.

After that, at the timing of T17, the variable display of normal symbols (the second time in the time-saving game state) to be lost is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the time saving game state, it is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T18, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T19, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, a temporary standby state is entered.

Thus, when a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving game state, lighting of the right-handed indicator 67 and output of the advantageous state signal are continued. Therefore, there is no need to temporarily turn off the right-handed indicator 67 or temporarily stop the output of the advantageous state signal, and control can be simplified.

(Timing chart when the time-saving normal figure remaining number becomes 0 and the time-saving game state ends)
FIG. 41 is a timing chart when the time saving normal figure remaining number of times (G) becomes 0 and the time saving game state ends.

First, at the timing of T1, the 78th hit variation display of normal symbols is started in the time saving game state. This fluctuation display is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. At this time, since the game is in the time-saving game state, the right-handed display 67 is lit, and the advantageous state signal is output. In addition, since it is in a time-saving gaming state, while the information tallying (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended), it is necessary to set the game section Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs is performed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the stop display of normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T3, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the second start port 47 makes it easy for the game ball to win. An auxiliary game that opens (long open) with a long open pattern is executed. Then, at the timing of T4, when the game ball wins the second start port 47, the second special symbol small hit variation display (the normal symbol variation display and the auxiliary game are executed multiple times during the variation display, and the second hold A Stock Chance Fluctuation that allows you to stock (increase) memories is started.

After that, at the timing of T5, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting port 47, and the normal symbol losing variation display (79th time in the time saving game state) is started. This fluctuation display is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T6, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, a temporary standby state is entered.

Next, at the timing of T8, the winning variation display of normal symbols (the 80th time in the time-saving game state) is started. This fluctuation display is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T9, the stop display of normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T10, the second starting port 47 is opened (short opening) with a short opening pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to win (substantially does not win). An auxiliary game is executed. Then, at the timing of T11, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting port 47.例文帳に追加

At the timing of T12 after the lapse of a predetermined time from there, the winning variation display of normal symbols (99th time in the time-saving game state) is started. This fluctuation display is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T13, the stop display of normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T14, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 opens (long opening) in a long opening pattern that facilitates winning of game balls. . Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 between the timings of T14 and T15, the second reserve memory (hold memory for almost small wins or big wins) is stocked (increased).

In addition, at the timing of T15, the auxiliary game ends and the winning variation display of normal symbols is started. This fluctuation display is performed in the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving. In addition, the time-saving game state is terminated and the normal game state is started, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped, the right-handed display 67 is extinguished, and all the information tallying for calculating the normal base value is restarted. be.

Then, at the timing of T16, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T17, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the time-saving game state. Therefore, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern (long opening) in which the winning of game balls is easy. In addition, the right hitting indicator 67 lights up. Then, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 between the timing of T17 and the timing of T18, the second reserve memory (hold memory for almost small win or big win) is stocked (increased).

Next, at the timing of T18, the auxiliary game ends, and normal symbol losing variation display is started. This fluctuation display is performed in a normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Also, the right-handed indicator 67 is turned off. Then, at the timing of T19, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and the special symbols are stop displayed.

After that, at the timing of T20, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses and the stop time of the special symbols elapses, the small winning game is started. Then, at the timing between the timing of T20 and the timing of T21, the game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 50 enters the specific area 53, and at the timing of T21, when the small winning game ends, the big winning game ( Opening) is started to enter the low-probability short-time gaming state, the output of the jackpot signal and the output of the advantageous state signal are started, and the right-handed indicator 67 lights up. In addition, loss variation display of normal symbols is started.

In this way, when the small hit variation display (stock chance variation) of the second special symbol is started during the time saving game state, the variation display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are executed multiple times during the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to stock (increase) the second reserved memory. Therefore, it is possible to make the player eager to execute the variable display of the normal symbols that can stock (increase) the second reserved memory that is almost a small win or a big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, although the right-handed display 67 is turned off at the timing (timing of T15) when the time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state, the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes the hit started during the time-saving game state The lighting of the right hitting indicator 67 may be continued (delayed) until the auxiliary game executed as a result of is completed, and the right hitting indicator 67 may be extinguished at the timing when this auxiliary game is completed.

In addition, when the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state is lost, the right-handed display 67 may be extinguished at the timing of shifting to the normal game state (timing of T15). Further, when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is short-opened as a result of the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state, at the timing of shifting to the normal game state (timing of T15). When the auxiliary game in which the right-handed display 67 is extinguished and the second starting port 47 is opened for a long time as a result of the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state is executed, the timing at which the auxiliary game ends. , the right-handed indicator 67 may be extinguished.

In addition, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped at the timing (timing of T15) when the time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state, but the fluctuation display of the normal symbol that becomes the hit started during the time-saving game state. The output of the advantageous state signal may be continued (delayed) until the auxiliary game executed as a result of is completed, and the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing when the auxiliary game is completed.

Further, when the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state is lost, the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing of shifting to the normal game state (timing of T15). Further, when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is short-opened as a result of the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state, at the timing of shifting to the normal game state (timing of T15). When the auxiliary game in which the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped and the second starting port 47 is long opened as a result of the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time saving game state is executed, the timing at which the auxiliary game ends. , the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped.

(Main processing of production control unit)
Main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of main processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a inhibits all interrupts in step E1, performs CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted at step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs a sub random number update process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing in the effect control section 130m. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting control process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed in the customer waiting state where the special symbol fluctuation display and the special game (jackpot game, small winning game) are not executed, and the customer Processing for executing a customer waiting demonstration performance for stimulating a player's willingness to play is performed based on the lapse of the waiting time.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs operation-related effect execution processing. Specifically, the promotion performance to prompt the operation of the performance button 17 is executed during the effective period generated during the variable performance, and the degree of expectation that the big win game is executed is calculated according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the effective period. A process for executing a big-hit announcement effect of the operation system that suggests (makes an expectation that a big-hit game will be executed) is performed.

The "operation-based jackpot announcement effect" includes a dialogue announcement effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed depending on the type and display mode of the dialogue displayed on the image display device, and a cut-in image displayed on the image display device. A cut-in notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the execution of the jackpot game depending on the type and display mode, a success effect with an expectation degree of 100% for the execution of the jackpot game, or a failure with an expectation degree of 0% for the execution of the jackpot game. There are four types of win-lose determination effects that suggest whether or not a special game will be executed by the effect.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp lighting effect execution process. Specifically, by changing the light emission mode of the starter lamp 75 according to the change in the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the icon, the lamp light is emitted to suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. Perform processing for executing the production.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, the production mode (production stage) in which the production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined is updated. It is determined whether or not the conditions (change in game state, win of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance where the result is lost, etc.) are satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, the performance mode is changed to multiple performances. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" is the normal production mode A to D set in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), the countdown mode, the time-saving production mode A set in the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state A time reduction performance mode B to be set, a time reduction performance mode C to be set in the third time reduction game state, and the like are provided.

"Normal production modes A to D" are production modes that can be set when the normal special figure variation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 21(a) is selected.
"Countdown mode" is an effect mode that can be set when the normal special figure variation pattern determination table 2 shown in Fig. 21(b) is selected.

In addition, in the normal production modes A to D and the countdown mode, the production pattern 70a is displayed in a display mode including characters and numbers. In addition, the difference between the normal production modes A to D and the countdown mode is whether or not the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbol is displayed until at least the third time-saving gaming state occurs. , background images, BGM, etc. are also made different.

"Time saving production mode AB" selects the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving shown in Fig. 22 (a) or the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table 2 for time saving shown in Fig. 22 (b) Sometimes it is a production mode that can be set.
"Time reduction production mode C" is a production mode that can be set when the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for time reduction shown in Fig. 22(b) is selected.

In the time-saving production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is displayed in a display mode of only numbers without characters. Also, the difference between the time-saving production modes A to C is that the background image, BGM, and the like are different.

The sub CPU 130a performs a third time-saving production process in step E750. Specifically, the third time-saving system production for suggesting information related to the occurrence of the third time-saving gaming state (RWM clear negative production, which suggests that the RWM clear described later is not performed (is stationary), Activation counter display that suggests the number of fluctuations until transition to the 3 o'clock game state, etc.) is performed. In addition, the detail of a 3rd time reduction system production|presentation process is mentioned later.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150 is performed.

At step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c at step E100, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Mode flow showing transition of game modes)
FIG. 44(a) is a mode flow showing the transition of the game mode from the normal game state, and FIG. 44(b) is a mode flow showing the transition of the game mode from the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), when the special symbol jackpot variation display ends in the normal game state, one of the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, and the third jackpot game is executed, and the first jackpot game is executed. When it ends, it shifts to the normal performance mode A (initial performance mode) which is the normal game state, and when the second jackpot game ends, it shifts to the time reduction performance mode A which is the first time reduction game state, and the third jackpot game ends. Then, it shifts to the time saving performance mode B which is the second time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations reaches the prescribed number of times (750 times) at the time when the loss fluctuation display of the special symbol is completed in the normal game state, the time reduction production mode C, which is the third time reduction game state without going through the jackpot game, is entered. Transition.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), when the normal symbol loss variation display is started in the time saving game state, the remaining number of time saving normal symbols (G) becomes "0", and at this time the second special symbol non- During the variable display or during the loss variation of the second special symbol, a result display showing the result of the game in a series of advantageous intervals (during the time-saving game state or the jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is executed. Then, when the loss variation display of the normal symbols ends, the normal game state is shifted to the normal production mode D (special mode after the end of the time saving), and then the mode transition condition is satisfied (for example, 10 times special symbol variation display, When a mode transition lottery is won, etc., the mode shifts to the normal presentation mode A.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the time-saving game state, the number of remaining time-saving special figures or the number of remaining time-saving small hits (Z) becomes "0", and at this time, there is an auxiliary game in which the normal symbol is displayed in a non-variable manner or the second start port 47 is short-opened. In the case of normal pattern variable display in the case of execution, the result display in a series of advantageous sections is not executed, and the normal performance mode A, which is the normal game state, is entered.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, the small-hit game is executed after the small-hit fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started with super-shortening fluctuation, and the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 during this small-hit game, and the time-saving feature is displayed. When the small winning game ends with the figure remaining number (J), the time-saving small winning number remaining (Z), or the time-saving general figure remaining number (G) being "0", the result display in a series of advantageous sections is executed. Then, the normal performance mode A, which is the normal game state, is entered.

On the other hand, even when the small winning game is executed after the small winning variation display of the second special symbol is started with the ultra-shortened variation in the time saving game state, and the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 during the small winning game. , If the remaining number of time-saving special figures (J), the remaining number of times of saving time (Z), and the remaining number of times of saving time (G) are larger than "0", the time-saving game state after the end of the small winning game It returns to the original time-saving performance mode (any of time-saving performance mode A, time-saving performance mode B, or time-saving performance mode C).

Also, in the time saving game state, the small winning game is executed after the small winning variation display of the second special symbol is started with super shortened variation, and when the game ball wins in the specific area 53 during this small winning game, this small winning game is executed. After finishing the winning game, the fourth big winning game is executed, and after finishing the fourth big winning game, the game is shifted to the time saving performance mode A which is the first time saving game state.

In addition, when the big winning variation display or the small winning variation display of the second special symbol is started with the stock chance variation in the time saving game state, the stock chance mode effect is performed. The stock chance mode continues even if the remaining number of time-saving normal patterns (G) becomes "0" due to the execution of variable display of normal symbols during the stock chance mode. In addition, when the big winning variation display of the second special symbol in the stock chance fluctuation is finished, the third big winning game is executed, and after the third big winning game is finished, the game is shifted to the time saving performance mode B which is the second time saving game state.

Furthermore, when the small winning variation display of the second special symbol in the stock chance fluctuation is completed, the small winning game is executed, and even if the game ball does not win in the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the time saving special figure. If the remaining number of times (J), the remaining number of times of reducing the time (Z) and the remaining number of times of reducing the time (G) are larger than "0", the original which is the time saving game state after the end of the small winning game It returns to the time-saving performance mode (any one of the time-saving performance mode A, the time-saving performance mode B, or the time-saving performance mode C). On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the fourth big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends, and the time saving performance in the first time saving game state after the fourth big winning game ends. Go to mode A.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
Command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302, and if the command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change notification processing in step E303. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting confirmation notification processing in step E305. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. In the case of , a process of setting a notification instruction command for executing the above-described power restoration notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, processing for executing power-on notification or power recovery notification, and the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable An initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined mode, an initial light emission for causing the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined mode, and the like are performed.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error system designation command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error system designation command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error type designation command" includes unrecoverable error designation command, illegal winning error designation command, abnormal winning error designation command, magnetic error designation command, radio wave error designation command, door open error start designation command, door open error end designation Commands, operation error specification commands, etc. are included.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notification according to the type of error designation command received (non-recoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification etc.), the notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure reservation number designation command or a general figure reservation number designation command in step E312. If it is a special figure reservation number designation command or normal figure reservation number designation command, the process is moved to step E313, and if it is not a special figure reservation number designation command or normal figure reservation number designation command, the process is moved to step E314 .

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number designation command, second special figure reservation number designation command) is received, the number of special diagram reservations stored in the sub RAM 130c is updated. Then, the sub-RAM 130c the effect instruction command for updating (increase or decrease) the display of the number of reservations in the first reservation icon in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first reservation number display area 70E, and the second reservation number display area 70F process to set in the transmission buffer of As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the pending icon in the first pending icon display area 70B, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F pending number display will be processed to update (increase or decrease) the

In addition, the display (update) of the first reserved icon in the first reserved icon display area 70B is performed in the case of the normal game state, and is not performed in the case of the time-saving game state, and the first reserved number display area 70E And updating of the display of the number of reservations in the second reservation number display area 70F is performed regardless of the game state.

In addition, when the general pattern reservation number designation command is received, the general pattern reservation number stored in the sub RAM 130 is updated, and the general pattern reservation icon in the general pattern reservation icon display area 70D, the general pattern reservation number display area 70G A process of setting an effect instruction command for updating (increasing or decreasing) the display of the pending number in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the normal pattern pending icon in the normal pattern pending icon display area 70D and the pending number display in the normal pattern pending number display area 70G are updated (increase or decrease ) will be processed.

It should be noted that the display (update) of the normal pattern reserved icon in the normal pattern reserved icon display area 70D is performed in the case of the time saving game state, and is not performed in the case of the normal game state, and the normal pattern reserved number display area 70G Updating the display of the number of reservations in is performed regardless of the game state.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure prefetching designation command or a normal figure prefetching designation command in step E314. If it is a special figure prefetching designation command or a normal figure prefetching designation command, the received prefetching designation command (special figure scheduled variation pattern, general figure scheduled variation pattern) is set in the later-described prefetching storage area of the sub RAM 130c and then step The process is moved to E315, and if it is not a prefetching specification command (first special figure prefetching specification command, second special figure prefetching specification command, normal figure prefetching specification command), the process is moved to step E318.

"Prefetching storage area" is the first prefetching storage unit for sequentially storing the prefetching information (such as the special plan fluctuation pattern) based on the first special prefetching designation command, and the second prefetching reservation information based on the prefetching designation command and the storage unit (0th storage unit) for storing the prefetch information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) being executed, and the first prefetch The storage section and the second look-ahead storage section are divided into first to fourth storage sections, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-described first special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and receive the first special figure prefetch designation command Then, the read-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the first reserved storage. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-described second special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and receive the second special figure prefetch designation command Then, the read-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the second reserved storage. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the special figure determination information execution storage area described above, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit The prefetch information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the prefetch information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second prefetch unit is stored. be.

In step E315, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing. Specifically, by displaying the pending icon or the icon displayed on the image display device in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) different from the normal display mode (normal icon), the result is advantageous to the player. Whether to execute an icon change effect that suggests the degree of expectation (possibility) to be (a big win game is executed, a small win game is executed, an auxiliary game is executed), and the icon change effect to be executed A process for determining the mode of presentation and the like is performed. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a win-time lighting effect determination process. Specifically, the top lamp 10b located at the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame illumination device 10 is caused to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode when the game ball enters the start hole. (Jackpot game is executed, small winning game is executed, auxiliary game is executed). A process for determining the effect mode of the light emission effect is performed.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect determination process. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, a result that is advantageous to the player (a big winning game is executed, a small winning game is executed Determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead continuous effect (suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game being run) to expect that the auxiliary game will be executed) and the type of the look-ahead continuous effect to be executed, and the look-ahead continuous effect , a process of setting the effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed. The details of the look-ahead continuous effect determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command or a normal symbol designation command in step E318. If it is a special design designation command or a normal design designation command, the process is moved to step E319, and if it is not a special design designation command or a normal design designation command, the process is moved to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E319. Specifically, a process for determining the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, etc. is performed.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command or a normal figure variation pattern designation command in step E320. If it is a special figure variation pattern specification command or normal figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E325.

In step E321, the sub CPU 130a performs variation effect pattern determination processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the special figure variation pattern designation command or the general figure variation pattern designation command received, the variation effect pattern which is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by the effect device including the image display device is determined. , a process of setting an effect instruction command indicating a variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed. The details of the variation effect pattern determination process will be described later.

In step E322, the sub CPU 130a performs an announcement effect determination process. Specifically, based on the variable effect pattern determined in step E321, the result is advantageous to the player (the big winning game is executed, the small winning game is executed, the auxiliary game is executed). It decides whether or not to execute the advance notice effect that expects , determines the effect mode (pattern) of the notice effect to be executed, and sets the execution information of the notice effect in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing in step E323. Specifically, processing for starting the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E315, or changing the display mode of the pending icon already displayed or the icon is performed.

In step E324, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect execution process. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous effect determined in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 or changing the effect mode to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol symbol confirmation command or a normal symbol symbol confirmation command. If it is a special symbol design confirmation command or a normal symbol symbol confirmation command, the process is moved to step E326, and if it is not a special symbol symbol confirmation command or a normal symbol symbol confirmation command, the process is moved to step E327. .

In step E326, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol stop processing. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the temporarily stopped state to end the variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, this command analysis process is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes a jackpot opening designation command, a jackpot round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, a small winning opening designation command, a small winning ending designation command, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game effect determination processing in step E328. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, a process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the big win game or the small win game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and the round is performed. In the case of the specified command, the round effect of the round game is determined and the effect instruction command for executing the round effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the ending effect of the small winning game and executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed, and the current command analysis process is finished. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a, in step E315-1, refers to the prefetching designation command received from the main control board 110 (first special prefetching designation command, second special prefetching designation command, general prefetching designation command), step E315- In 2, it is determined whether or not the current period is during which the icon change effect can be executed. If it is during the period during which the icon change effect can be executed, the process proceeds to step E315-3, and if it is not during the period during which the icon change effect can be executed, it is assumed that the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E315-7.

The “executable period of the icon change effect” means that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the normal game state is entered when the first special figure prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received. , When receiving a general pattern look-ahead designation command based on winning a prize to the general pattern gate 44, it is a time-saving game state (specific game state). In addition, when the second special figure prefetch designation command based on the winning to the second starting port 47 is received, the icon change effect is not executed.

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a targets the pending storage corresponding to the previously received first special figure prefetching specification command if it is the first special figure prefetching specification command, with the normal figure prefetching specification command If there is, it is determined whether or not there is a change scenario in the pending memory corresponding to the previously received normal map prefetch designation command, that is, whether or not the change scenario is set in the prefetch information storage area. If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process moves to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E315-5. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E315-6. Specifically, referring to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. Based on the type of specified command (scheduled variation pattern) and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, one icon final display mode is determined from among a plurality of icon final display modes.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (one of blue icon, red icon, and rainbow icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 48) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the pending icon change scenario determination table (special figure pending icon change scenario determination table or general figure pending icon change scenario determination table) shown in FIG. One change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the number of pending memories (first special symbol, normal symbol) and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the winning icon. The icon display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the suspended icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the preceding hold. The icon change effect may be executed when the action is not to be performed, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the ready-to-win effect is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, even if the advance hold includes the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but if the advance hold does not include the reach effect, the reach effect The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) than in the case of including the

In addition, when the general figure prefetch designation command is received in the time saving game state, the icon change effect is executed, but even if the general figure prefetch designation command is received in the time reduction game state, the icon change effect is not executed. may In this case, the icon may be displayed but the icon change effect may not be executed, or the icon itself may not be displayed and the icon change effect may not be executed.

In addition, even if the second special figure prefetch designation command is received during the time saving game state, the icon change effect is not executed, but in the time saving game state the number of reserved icons corresponding to the second reservation memory (U2) is displayed, and when the second special figure prefetch designation command is received, the icon change effect may be executed. On the other hand, the number of reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved memory (U2) may be displayed, but the icon change effect may not be executed.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the game state (normal game state, time saving game state), the type of symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), the type of pre-reading designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern , Normal map scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of the final display mode of each icon, and the final display mode of the selected icon are associated, and as a reference, the production contents of the scheduled variation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead designation command is described.

In the final display mode of the icon, there are a normal icon (white icon) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for a big or small win, and a special icon (blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) that suggests the degree of expectation for a big or small win. is set. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win or a small win for a special icon is higher in the order of (white icon<) blue icon<red icon<rainbow icon (big win confirmed).

As a first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47, when the first special figure prefetch designation command indicates a big hit, a rainbow icon may be determined as the icon final display mode. On the other hand, if the general map prefetch designation command indicates a win, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final display mode of the icon. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by preventing the player from being overjoyed at the time when the auxiliary game in which the execution of the jackpot game is not confirmed is executed.

As a second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47, the icon change effect is more likely to be executed when the general pattern look-ahead designation command is a win than when it is a loss (blue icon or red icon). By doing so, it becomes easy to increase the expectation of the player when the auxiliary game (opening of the second start port 47) which is likely to lead to a big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a third feature of the icon final mode determination table shown in FIG. There is a point that the icon change effect is more likely to be executed (the icon is more likely to be a blue icon or a red icon). By doing so, it becomes easy to increase the player's sense of expectation when the chance variation with a higher expectation of winning than the shortening variation is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. When an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start port 47 opens longer (opens easily for winning) than in the case of a loss camouflage variation (win) which is a variation pattern when the auxiliary game for difficult winning (opens for easy winning) is executed. In the case of chance variation (win), which is a variation pattern of , icon change effect is more likely to be executed (blue icon or red icon is likely to occur). By doing so, it becomes easy to increase the expectation of the player when the auxiliary game (opening of the second start port 47) which is likely to lead to a big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A fifth feature of the icon final mode determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that the icon change effect is more likely to be executed (the icon is more likely to be a blue icon) in the case of the false camouflage variation (hit), which is the pattern.

As a sixth feature of the icon final mode determination table shown in FIG. 47, when a big win game is executed, or when an auxiliary game that is likely to lead to a big win (auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is long open) is executed , an icon change effect (display of a rainbow icon ) can be executed, but since it is not determined whether or not the third time-saving gaming state occurs, an icon change effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving gaming state will occur is not executed. The point is that it is By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the occurrence of the third time-saving game state is idle while heightening the player's expectation for the big win, and to improve the amusement of the game. .

It should be noted that when the general figure look-ahead designation command indicates a win, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final display mode of the icon, but an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 opens for a long time is executed. In the case of chance variation (hit) at time, as long as the game ball is hit to the right, there is almost a 100% chance of entering the second starting port 47 and the result is a small win or a big win, so the final display of the icon. As a mode, a rainbow icon may be determined. By doing so, the player's awareness of the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for a long time can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the rainbow icon is determined when the general map look-ahead designation command indicates a win, the rainbow icon is determined as a jackpot rather than the rainbow icon as a win It is better to have a higher percentage of By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between a big win and a win that is not guaranteed to become a big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Change scenario determination table)
Figure 48 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure pending icon change scenario determination table referred to when determining the change scenario of the first pending icon, Figure 48 (b) is a change scenario of the normal figure pending icon It is a diagram showing a normal figure pending icon change scenario determination table referred to when determining.

In each change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of special symbols or normal symbols stored corresponding to the look-ahead designation command (first special figure look-ahead specification command, normal figure look-ahead specification command), the selection rate of each change scenario (%) and the change scenario to be selected are associated, and for reference, the prior change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

"Pre-fluctuation" means the special figure judgment information or the normal figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command The fluctuation display executed based on the special figure judgment information or the normal figure judgment information (Variation effect), and the "variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information or normal figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. be.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 04, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during the execution of the prior variation and during the execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

The first feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is different from the rate of change to the highly anticipated normal figure reservation icon. By doing so, it is possible to make the tendency of icon change different between the special figure reservation icon and the general figure reservation icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 is the ratio of displaying the special reserved icon in the final icon display mode when winning, and the ratio of displaying the normal reserved icon in the final icon display mode when winning. There are some points that are different from By doing so, it is possible to make the tendency of icon change different between the special figure reservation icon and the general figure reservation icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48, even if the final display mode of the icon is the same (for example, blue icon, red icon), the change scenario (change pattern) of the special figure pending icon and the number of change scenarios (change patterns) of the normal map reservation icon are different. By doing so, it is possible to make the tendency of icon change different between the special figure reservation icon and the general figure reservation icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the third time-saving game state occurs, the icon change effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving game state will occur is not executed, but the third time-saving game state occurs. An icon change effect (for example, display of a yellow blinking icon, output of a change sound, etc.) suggesting that is executed. In this case, the execution of the icon change effect suggesting that the third time-saving gaming state occurs is restricted (for example, execution may not be executed, or even when executed, no change sound may be output).

(Light emission effect determination processing at the time of winning of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 49, the prize-winning lighting effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing a win-time lighting effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a, in step E316-1, refers to the prefetching designation command received from the main control board 110 (first special prefetching designation command, second special prefetching designation command, general prefetching designation command), step E316- In 2, it is determined whether or not the current time is the period during which the light emitting effect for winning a prize can be executed. If it is during the period during which the lighting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process is shifted to step E316-3, and if it is not during the period during which the lighting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the lighting effect at the time of winning is executed based on the prefetch designation command received this time. Assuming that it will not be performed, the current lighting effect determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

The ``executable period of the light emitting effect at the time of winning'' means that the jackpot game is not being executed, and when the first special figure prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received, it is in the normal game state. That, when receiving the second special prefetching designation command based on the winning to the second start port 47 and the general drawing prefetching designation command based on the winning to the general gate 44, it is in the time saving game state etc. be done.

In step E316-3, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining a winning light emission effect pattern for determining the effect pattern of the winning light emission effect to be executed in the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and step E316-3. In 4, a win-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining a win-time light-emitting effect pattern is selected. The details of the win-time light emission effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E316-5, the sub CPU 130a determines a prize-winning lighting effect pattern. Specifically, referring to the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. , one winning light emission performance pattern is determined from a plurality of winning light emission performance patterns based on the selection rate (%) of each winning light emission performance pattern.

In step E316-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined winning light emitting effect pattern is a pattern for executing the winning light emitting effect. In the case of the pattern of executing the light emission effect at the time of winning, the processing is shifted to step E316-7, and in the case of the pattern of not executing the light emission effect at the time of winning, the current light emission effect determination processing at the time of winning ends.

In step E316-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the winning light emission effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emission effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emission effect determination process. As a result, the win light emission effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the win light emission effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the win light emission effect execution command.

(Light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a win-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a win-time light-emitting effect pattern.

In the winning lighting effect pattern determination table, the type of pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), the type of prefetching designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning lighting effect pattern ), and a selected prize-winning lighting effect pattern are associated with each other.

As the winning-time light-emitting performance patterns, a winning-time light-emitting performance pattern 00 for which the winning-time light-emitting performance is not executed and winning-time light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02 for which the winning-time light-emitting performance is executed are set. In the prize-winning lighting effect patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light, and the audio output device 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect.

As the first feature of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), the special figure prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), which has a high degree of expectation that will result in an advantageous result for the player, is more likely to execute the light emission effect at the time of winning. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the highly expected variable performance that will result in an advantageous result for the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the prize-winning emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. However, there is a point that it is easy to execute the light emission effect at the time of winning. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a big win or a win (a big win can be expected via a small win after winning the second starting port 47), and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

A third feature of the winning emission pattern determination table shown in FIG. Even before the predetermined period (for example, one variation before) of the variation performance in which the big winning game or the auxiliary game (the second starting port 47 is won and the big winning via the small winning can be expected) is executed, the big winning game or the auxiliary game While it is possible to execute a winning light emission effect (rainbow light emission & sound effect output) that suggests in advance that a game (wining a prize at the second start port 47 and expecting a big win via a small win) will be executed, When the 3 o'clock short game state occurs, it is mentioned that the win-time light-emitting effect suggesting in advance that the 3 o'clock short game state will occur is not executed. By doing this, the player's expectation for a big win or a win (a big win can be expected via a small win by winning a prize in the second start port 47) is heightened, and the occurrence of the third time-saving game state does not occur. Such inconvenience can be avoided, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the winning light emission pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that it is possible to execute the light emission effect at the time of winning in the light emission effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to provide a light-emitting effect pattern at the time of winning that confirms the jackpot (for example, the top lamp 10b emits light in rainbow colors and outputs a confirmation sound from the audio output device 9). It is preferable to determine the light-emitting performance pattern at the time of winning, which will result in the determination of the jackpot at the lowest rate when is executed.

In addition, when the third time-saving game state occurs, the prize-winning lighting effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving game state will occur is not executed, but the third time-saving game state occurs. A win-time lighting effect (for example, flashing blue, outputting a sound effect, etc.) may be executed to suggest that the player wins. In this case, prior to a predetermined period (for example, one variation before) of the variation effect in which the jackpot game or the auxiliary game (the second start port 47 can be won and the jackpot via the small hit can be expected) is executed, the third The execution of the light emission effect at the time of winning, which suggests the occurrence of the time-saving gaming state, may be restricted (for example, it is not executed, and even if it is executed, no sound effect is output, etc.).

(Look-ahead continuous effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The look-ahead continuous effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

Sub CPU130a, in step E317-1, from the main control board 110 determines whether or not it has received the first special figure prefetch designation command. When the first special figure prefetching designation command is received, the process is moved to step E530-2, and when the first special figure prefetching designation command is not received, the current prefetching continuous effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received first special figure look-ahead designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

At step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the present time is the period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed. If it is during the look-ahead zone effect executable period, the process is moved to step E317-4, and if it is not the look-ahead zone effect executable period, the look-ahead zone effect based on the first special figure look-ahead designation command received this time is performed. The process is moved to step E317-6 assuming that it is not executed.

"Prefetching Zone Effect" refers to effecting during zone over one or more variable effects (display of prefetching zone background image, display of blue zone image or red heat zone image, output of zone BGM or heat zone BGM). This is an effect that continuously suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by a background image, character information, and color information (expected value information), and is a kind of look-ahead continuous effect.

The ``executable period of the look-ahead zone effect'' includes, for example, when there is no pre-reading zone effect to be executed in the preceding hold, when the jackpot game is not in progress, and when the normal game state is in progress. Therefore, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the normal game state, but the look-ahead zone effect is not executed in the time-saving game state.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone effect. Details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, one look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead zone effect scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead zone effect as the effect scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone effect scenario in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present time is the executable period of the look-ahead countdown effect. If it is during the prefetching countdown effect executable period, the process proceeds to step E317-9, and if it is not during the prefetching countdown effect executable period, it is assumed that the prefetching countdown effect based on the prefetching designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead countdown effect" is a countdown effect (display of count image, output of count sound) over one or more variable effects. It is a suggestive production, and it is a kind of look-ahead continuous production.

The ``executable period of the look-ahead countdown effect'' includes that there is no precedent hold to execute the look-ahead countdown effect, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the game is in a time-saving game state. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed in the normal game state, but the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed in the time-saving game state.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 53) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead countdown effect. Details of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead countdown effect scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead countdown production scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, one look-ahead countdown effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead countdown effect scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead countdown effect as the effect scenario in which the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch countdown effect scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead countdown effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead countdown effect is performed. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous effect determination process ends.

Thus, when the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, the look-ahead continuous performance is executed, and when the variable performance corresponding to the normal design is executed, the look-ahead continuous performance is executed. It is designed not to be Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the case where the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable performance corresponding to the normal symbol is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, when the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, while the look-ahead continuous performance is executed, the variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol (variable performance of only special symbols, etc.) is executed. In this case, the look-ahead continuous effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the case where the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that the look-ahead continuous effect may be executed when the variable effect corresponding to the normal symbol is executed. In this case, the execution ratio in the case where the winning variation performance corresponding to the normal symbol is executed may be lower than the case in which the big winning variation performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed. It can be reversed. Also, the execution ratio in the case where the loss variation performance corresponding to the normal symbol is executed may be lower than the case where the loss variation performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, or vice versa. good too.

(Look-ahead Zone Production Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table referred to when determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario.

In the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table, the number of reserved first special symbols, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the first special look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the production scenario for each look-ahead zone production, and the selected look-ahead Effect scenarios of zone effects are associated with each other, and for reference, advance variations in each effect scenario and effect modes of look-ahead zone effects in the changes are described.

"Advance fluctuation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received first special figure prefetch designation command. And "the variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received first special figure prefetch designation command.

"Zone" is the execution of normal effects during the zone (display of the look-ahead zone background image, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM). This means that a heat zone middle effect (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of a heat zone BGM) with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the effect is executed.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, and a scenario in which the zone effect is executed during the change without executing the zone effect during the preliminary change ( For example, a scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. The point is that an effect scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to an effect mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of the special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the effect mode of the effect in the zone progresses (changes), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the effect state of the look-ahead zone effect progresses (changes) more easily with the change than with the advance change. By doing so, it is possible to easily maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to the climax in the fluctuation, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that a look-ahead zone effect suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed and a third time-saving game state occur. One of the points is that the look-ahead zone production that suggests confirmation is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the result of the look-ahead zone effect, thereby increasing the player's expectation for a big win and enhancing the amusement of the game.

In addition, although it is possible to execute a look-ahead zone effect that suggests that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, a look-ahead that suggests that the occurrence of the third time-saving game state is decided. Zone effects may not be executed.

(Look-ahead countdown effect scenario decision table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table referred to when determining a look-ahead countdown effect scenario.

In the look-ahead countdown production scenario determination table, the number of pending first special symbols, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the first special figure look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the production scenario for each look-ahead countdown production, and the selected look-ahead Production scenarios for the countdown production are associated with each other, and for reference, the pre-variation in each production scenario and the production mode of the anticipatory countdown production in the variation are described.

"Advance fluctuation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received first special figure prefetch designation command. And "the variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received first special figure prefetch designation command.

"Count 3" means that a count image indicating "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 2" means that a count image indicating "2" is displayed and a count sound is output. "Count 1" means displaying a count image indicating "1" and outputting a count sound. "Count 0" means displaying a count image indicating "0". and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that a look-ahead countdown effect suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed and a third time-saving game state occur. One of the points is that the look-ahead countdown effect that suggests confirmation is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the result of the look-ahead countdown effect, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the big win and enhancing the amusement of the game.

In addition, although it is possible to execute a look-ahead countdown effect that suggests that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, a look-ahead that suggests that the occurrence of the third time-saving game state is confirmed. The countdown effect may not be executed.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 47 to 53)
Here, as the first feature related to various tables related to the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. Execution of a predetermined pre-reading effect suggested in advance (icon change effect, winning light emission effect, etc.) is restricted, and during the time-saving game state, the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern suspension memory (F)) is displayed in advance Predetermined look-ahead effects (icon change effect, winning lighting effect, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state in which the variable display of normal symbols is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature related to various tables related to the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. Number of types of look-ahead effects (icon change effect , Light-emitting effect at the time of winning) is less. By doing so, while improving the production effect in the normal game state, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling annoyed by the look-ahead production in the time-saving game state, thereby improving the interest of the game. Become.

As a third feature related to various tables related to the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. The point is that the execution of the icon change rendering that preliminarily suggests the result of (second reserved storage (U2)) is restricted. By doing so, it becomes easier to attract the player's interest to the variable display of the normal symbols than to the variable display of the second special symbols in the time-saving game state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature related to various tables related to the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. The number of types of look-ahead effects (icon change effect, winning light emission effect) that suggests in advance the result of the variable display of the normal symbols executed during the time-saving game state is larger than the (light emission effect at the time of winning). There is a point. By doing so, it becomes easier to attract the player's interest to the variable display of the normal symbols than to the variable display of the second special symbols in the time-saving game state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Variation production pattern determination processing of production control unit)
The fluctuation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart of the variation effect pattern determination process in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the process moves to step E321-3, and if it is not in the normal game state (time-saving game state), the process moves to step E321-4.

In step E321-3, the sub CPU 130a selects the normal variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 55(a)), and shifts the process to step E321-5. The details of the normal variation effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E321-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the time-saving variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 55(b)), and shifts the process to step E321-5.

In step E321-5, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from among a plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E321-6, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation production pattern judgment table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a normal variable performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the variable performance pattern in the normal game state, and FIG. 56 is referred to when determining the variable performance pattern in the time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table for reduction of working hours performed.

As shown in Figures 55 and 56, the variation effect pattern determination table includes symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), variation pattern specification command (special figure variation pattern specification command, normal figure variation pattern specification command), the selection rate (%) of each variable production pattern, and the selected variable production pattern are associated, and the production configuration in each variable production pattern is described for reference. there is In addition, in the variable performance except for the "special symbol variation" described later, both the variable display of the performance symbol 70 and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are performed.

"Variation" in the column of effect configuration indicates that the normal variable display is executed in which the ready-to-win state by the effect pattern 70a is not formed.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is performed in which the reach state is not formed for a shorter period of time than the normal variation display.

"Pseudo-failure" means that after temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a during one time of variable display of the special symbol, the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed or not. It shows that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed as a result of not being performed.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that after performing an effect inciting whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed, the pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of the pseudo-continuous effect being performed.
“(Variation → Pseudo-success) x 2” is an effect in which a pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of performing a pseudo-continuous effect after performing a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. is set as one set, and two sets of the effect are performed.
“(Variation → Pseudo-success) x 3” is an effect in which a pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of performing a pseudo-continuous effect after performing a stimulating effect to incite whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed. is set as one set, and three sets of the effect are performed.

"Variation (first episode)" refers to the first stage production (story production) of the stage production (story production) that can be executed in a variable production including pseudo failure and pseudo success, and the production can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the first episode of the story) will be performed.
"Variation (Episode 2)" is the second stage production (story production) of the stage production (story production) that can be executed in a variable production including pseudo failure and pseudo success, and the production can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the second story following the first story) will be performed.
"Variation (episode 3)" refers to the third stage production (story production) of the stage production (story production) that can be executed in a variable production including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and in which the production can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the third story following the second story) will be performed.

"N reach" indicates that the above-described normal reach effect is executed.
"SP reach" indicates that the above-described SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that the above-described SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-described full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SPSP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
“Full spin development” indicates that a development effect suggesting full spin reach is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect suggesting whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective period.
"Failure" indicates that a determined failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed as a result of the determined effect.
"Success" indicates that a determined success effect suggesting that a jackpot game is performed is executed as a result of the determined effect.

"Loss" means to temporarily stop by forming a losing dot (a mode of displaying a losing dot such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dot to be described later) by means of the production pattern 70a which is composed only of numbers and does not include characters. is shown.
"c symbol loss" means that the performance symbol 70a of the display mode including the character forms a losing dot (a false display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dot to be described later) and temporarily stops. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is displayed on the image display device.
"Pattern match" means that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a winning number (a big hit display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a which is composed only of numbers and does not include characters.
"c pattern match" indicates that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a winning number (large winning display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a of the display mode including characters.

"Re-lottery" means whether or not the performance symbol 70a temporarily stopped with a winning eye (big win display mode) becomes a winning eye that is more advantageous to the player than this winning eye (for example, the first big winning game is executed (“222”, “444”, “666”, “888”) to the odd winning numbers (“111”, “111”, "555", "999", etc.), the most advantageous third jackpot game is executed from the even-numbered winning number for which the first jackpot is executed and the odd-numbered winning number for which the second jackpot is executed. After inciting the odd number of hits (“333, 777” etc.) to be played), a promotion success effect will be performed as an advantageous hit, or an advantageous hit will be performed. It shows that a re-lottery effect is executed in which a promotion failure effect that does not become is performed.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
“Strong vibration for 1 second” indicates that a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

"Special symbol variation (no effect symbol variation)" indicates that only the variable display by the special symbol TZ is executed without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a.
"Special symbol loss" means that the special symbol TZ forms a losing dot (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dot to be described later) and stops.
"Special pattern matching" means forming a winning number (a winning display mode such as "222" or "777") by special patterns TZ and stopping.

"Short stock chance effect" indicates that a chance effect is executed to notify that it is a chance period for stocking (increasing) the second reserve memory (U2), which is almost a small win or a big win.
“Middle stock chance production” is a chance production that informs that it is a chance period for stocking (increasing) the second reserved memory (U2), which is almost a small win or a big win for a longer time than the short stock chance production. It indicates that
"Long stock chance production" is a chance production that informs that it is a chance period for stocking (increasing) the second reserved memory (U2), which is almost a small win or a big win for a longer time than the middle stock chance production. It indicates that

The "stock result effect" indicates that the effect of informing whether or not the second reserved memory (U2) is stocked is executed in the stock chance effect.
"Chance effect" means whether or not the chance result is advantageous to the player according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period (the second start port 47 opens in a long opening pattern). (whether or not the auxiliary game is executed) is executed.

As the first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, during the time-saving game state (second game state) different from the normal game state (first game state), the hit determination of the normal symbol is lost. When it is determined to be a first determination result different from the result (a hit in a normal symbol in which an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern that is easy to win a prize is executed), a variable display of the production symbol 70a In the variable production (game production) accompanied by a first result suggestion production (a production that suggests that the result is advantageous to the player, specifically, the three production patterns 70a are the same pattern as a stop result. production), while executing the time-saving game state (second game state), the second determination result different from the first determination result (the second start port 47 is difficult to win (substantially winning No) If it is determined to be a win in a normal pattern in which an auxiliary game that opens in a short opening pattern is executed), the first result suggestive effect in a variable effect (game effect) accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a A different second result suggesting effect (an effect suggesting that the result is unfavorable to the player, specifically, an effect in which the three effect symbols 70a are randomly stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped. Other than the eyes, the same production as in the case of a losing result) is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the result is not a losing result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the second result suggesting effect is a effect suggesting that the result is unfavorable to the player, even if the result is not a losing result, it is not possible to make the player expect excessively when it is not substantially advantageous to the player. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, during the time-saving game state (second game state) different from the normal game state (first game state), the hit determination of the normal symbol is lost. When it is determined to be a first determination result different from the result (a hit in a normal symbol in which an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern that is easy to win a prize is executed), a variable display of the production symbol 70a A plurality of production patterns 70a are stopped and displayed in the first mode (hit appearance in the state where three production patterns 70a are aligned) in the variable production accompanied by the normal during the time saving game state (second game state). A second determination result different from the first determination result in the hit determination of the pattern (the second start port 47 is opened in a short opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a prize (substantially does not win a prize) Winning in a normal pattern in which an auxiliary game is executed ), in a variable effect (game effect) accompanied by variable display of the effect symbols 70a, a plurality of effect symbols 70a are displayed in a second mode different from the first mode (three effect symbols 70a are There is a point that it is stopped and displayed when it comes out in a disjointed state (losing). By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the result is not a losing result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the stop result in the second mode is a losing result that suggests that the result is disadvantageous to the player, even if the result is not a losing result, the player will not be overwhelmed if it is not substantially advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the time-saving game state (second game state), the first determination result (the second start port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern that is easy to win) is executed. When it is determined to be a win in a normal pattern), a plurality of performance patterns 70a are set in a state where odd-numbered patterns are aligned in a variable performance with variable display of the performance patterns 70a, and a time-saving game state (second game state). A second determination result different from the first determination result in the hit determination of the normal symbol (the second start port 47 is difficult to win (substantially does not win)). If it is determined to be a hit at the bottom, the outcome pattern 70a is the same in the state where the even-numbered patterns are aligned in the variable performance with the variable display of the production pattern 70a, and the left and right production patterns 70a are the same. A reach-losing outcome in which the center performance pattern is different, or a special failure outcome with a predetermined regularity such that the left side and the center or the center and the right side performance pattern 70a are the same pattern and the remaining one is a different pattern. good too.

In addition, a probability variation gaming state is provided in which the probability of a big hit is higher than the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state, and the first judgment result (the second start port 47 wins If it is determined to be a win in a normal pattern in which an auxiliary game that opens with an easy long opening pattern is executed), the first result suggestive effect (game While performing an effect suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player, specifically, an effect in which the three performance patterns 70a are the same pattern and stop appearing), the normal pattern hits during the probability variation game state. Determined as a second determination result different from the first determination result (a hit in a normal pattern in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start port 47 is opened in a short opening pattern that makes it difficult to win (substantially does not win)) If it is done, a second result suggesting effect different from the first result suggesting effect (a effect suggesting that the result is disadvantageous to the player, a specific Specifically, the three performance symbols 70a may be the same performance as in the case where the three performance symbols 70a are random stop dots, and the stop dots other than the special symbol TZ are the losing results).

The third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that the first game effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the first special symbol Corresponding first fluctuation production, second fluctuation production corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol), and the second game production accompanied by the fluctuation display of the production symbol 70a corresponding to the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second start opening 47 can be executed to notify whether or not an auxiliary game that is opened in a long opening pattern that is easy to win a prize is executed), and during the normal game state (first game state) , the execution of the second game production (normal pattern fluctuation production) accompanied by the fluctuation display of the production pattern 70a corresponding to the fluctuation display of the normal pattern is restricted, and during the time saving game state (second game state), the normal pattern is displayed. It is possible to execute the second game production (normal pattern fluctuation production) with the fluctuation display of the production pattern 70a corresponding to the fluctuation display. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state (first game state) and the time-saving game state (second game state), and the production effect in the time-saving game state (second game state). It can be improved, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a probability variable game state is provided in which the probability of a big hit is higher than the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and during the normal game state, the second game effect with the variable display of the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol. Execution of (normal pattern fluctuation performance) is restricted, and in the probability variable gaming state, a second game production (normal pattern fluctuation performance) accompanied by variable display of production patterns 70a corresponding to variable display of normal patterns is made executable. good too.

As a fourth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the time-saving gaming state, the first variable performance ( Execution of the first game effect) is restricted, and it is possible to execute a second variable effect (second game effect) that performs a specific effect (various stock chance effects) in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. points. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the first game production (first fluctuation production), and the second game production (second fluctuation production accompanied by the fluctuation display of the production pattern 70a) corresponding to the fluctuation display of the normal symbols (second fluctuation display) can be executed, and the normal game state (first game state) when the variable display of normal symbols (second variable display) is executed, from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 command related to the variable display of normal symbols (normal symbol designation command, normal pattern fluctuation pattern specified command) is transmitted, but the execution of the second game effect (the second variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect pattern 70a) is restricted, and the normal symbol variable display ( When the second variation display) is executed, a command related to the variation display of normal symbols (normal symbol designation command, normal pattern variation pattern designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130, and the second game The point is that the production (the second variable production accompanied by the variable display of the production pattern 70a) is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state (second game state), and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when a variable probability game state is provided in which the probability of a big hit is higher than the normal game state or the time-saving game state, and the variable display of normal symbols (second variable display) is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state), A command (ordinary design designation command, normal design fluctuation pattern designation command) relating to the variable display of the normal design is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the second game performance (accompanied by the variable display of the performance design 70a) Second variation effect) may be executed.

As a sixth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, when a big win is achieved, a variable performance pattern in which a winning performance is executed and the symbols are aligned, and a successful determination after the symbols are aligned. The point is that there is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the case of a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a seventh feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The point is that a strong vibration effect (big hit determination vibration effect) is executed in which the button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the eighth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The point is that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A ninth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. After the execution of the low normal reach production, it is possible to execute the second stage production (movie playback of the second episode of the story), while the second stage production (story Playback of movie of episode 2) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect by making it different depending on the type of the ready-to-win performance whether or not the stage performance progresses, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the ready-to-win performance is always executed in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, a variable performance pattern in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is executed may be provided.

Also, if you temporarily stop with a losing result after a cut-in production or a decision failure production, it will be confirmed that you will lose, but after the cut-in production or decision failure production, it will be a big hit. may be executed.

(Notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
The notice effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern executed in the current variable effect, and in step E650-2, the result is advantageous to the player at the start of the change (in this embodiment, the jackpot A variable start role announcement determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining a role announcement pattern that makes the player expect that the game will be executed is selected, and the role announcement pattern is determined. The details of the fluctuation start accessory announcement determination table will be described later.

"Variation start role announcement effect" means that the role (first movable member 73a) at the start of the change effect is given according to the expectation that the player will have an advantageous result (in this embodiment, it will be a big win). It is a kind of big hit announcement production that operates in a different operation mode.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the change start role product notice effect is to execute the change start role product notice effect. If the fluctuation start character product announcement effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E650-5, and if the start character object announcement effect is to be executed, the character product announcement is performed in step E650-4. A character object announcement effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in a transmission buffer. As a result, the character product announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the variation start character product announcement effect corresponding to the character product announcement pattern is executed at the start of the variation effect.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a makes the player expect that the player will have an advantageous result (in this embodiment, a jackpot game is executed) in the performance period (high-speed fluctuation period) before the reach. A pre-reach advance notice determination table (see FIG. 59) for determining the advance notice pattern of the advance notice effect is selected, and the advance notice pattern is determined. The details of the pre-reach announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the dialogue notice effect. If the dialogue foretelling effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the dialogue foretelling effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

The "line notice effect" is to generate an effective period during a variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period), and to display an image that is advantageous to the player on the image display device according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective time. A dialogue image suggesting the degree of expectation that will result (in this embodiment, a big win) is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9 .

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the dialog announcement pattern determination table (see FIG. 60) for determining the dialog announcement pattern of the dialog announcement effect, and determines the dialog announcement pattern. Set a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the announcement pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialog announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialog announcement effect corresponding to the dialog announcement pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the step-up notice effect. If the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-10, and if the step-up notice effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-12.

The "step-up notice effect" is a plurality of steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) without generating the effective period of the effect button 17 during the variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period). By executing the step effects in a predetermined order until one of the steps (stages) is reached, the effect suggests the degree of expectation that the player will get an advantageous result (in this embodiment, a big win).

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 61) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up notice pattern. At 11, a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice performance corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Details of the step-up notice pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 62) for determining the pseudo-continuous effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect to determine the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and step E650-14. , a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, all-rotation development effect). If it is the variable effect pattern for executing the development effect, the process is shifted to step E650-16, and if it is not the variable effect pattern for executing the development effect, the process is shifted to step E650-18.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a selects the development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the development effect pattern of the development effect, determines the development effect pattern, and in step E650-17, determines the development effect pattern. A development effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect corresponding to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the development effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-18, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect (post-reach effect) or a chance effect. If it is a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, the process is shifted to step E650-19, and if it is not a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance or a chance performance, this time's notice performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect to determine the cut-in effect pattern, and step E650-21. , a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the cut-in effect corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a determined effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E650-25.

The sub CPU 130a selects the determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 65) for determining the determined effect pattern of the determined effect in step E650-23 to determine the determined effect pattern, and in step E650-24, determines the determined effect pattern. A decision effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the determined effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determined effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the determined effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is a variable performance pattern for executing a re-lottery performance, the process is moved to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable performance pattern for executing a re-lottery performance, the process is moved to step E650-28.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and steps E650-27. , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-28, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that allows execution of a fixed effect (results advantageous to the player). If it is a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, the process is moved to step E650-29, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, this time's notice performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-29, the sub CPU 130a selects a confirmed effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the confirmed effect pattern of the confirmed effect, determines the confirmed effect pattern, and determines the confirmed effect pattern in step E650-30. A finalized effect command corresponding to is set in the transmission buffer, and the current advance notice effect determination process is terminated. As a result, the fixed effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the fixed effect corresponding to the fixed effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

(Advance notice decision table at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a variation start role announcement determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the variation start role announcement effect.

The game state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), judgment result (jackpot judgment result, hit judgment result), fluctuation production pattern, each fluctuation start The selection rate (%) of the time role announcement pattern and the selected fluctuation start time role announcement pattern are associated with each other.

The pattern for notifying the character at the start of the fluctuation includes no notice, a rattling action in which the first movable member 73a swings up and down at the initial position (standby position) at the start of the fluctuation production, and the start of the fluctuation production. A weak lowering motion is set in which the first movable member 73a is lowered from the initial position to an intermediate position between the initial position and the production position and then returned to the initial position.

The first feature of the variable start time role announcement determination table shown in FIG. 58 is a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate). is executed, while it is possible to execute the announcement of the accessory at the start of the fluctuation (rattling action, weak descending action), in the normal game state, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (only the special symbol TZ is executed), the performance notice at the start of the fluctuation (rattling action, weak downward movement) is not executed, that is, the execution of the notice performance at the start of the fluctuation is restricted. be done. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the fluctuation start role announcement determination table shown in FIG. While (rattling motion, weakly falling motion) can be executed, in the normal game state, when the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, the variation start The point is that the time role announcement (rattling motion, weak downward motion) is not executed, that is, the execution of the fluctuation start time role announcement effect is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable start time role announcement determination table shown in FIG. In the case where a variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the symbols fluctuates, and a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) are executed, the variation start role The point is that the object announcement (rattling motion, weak downward motion) is not executed, that is, the execution of the variable start-time accessory announcement effect is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable effect is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is changed, or the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol and the special symbol TZ are changed When the variable performance to be displayed is executed, the variable start time accessory notice may be executed, and in this case, the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state. It may be performed at a lower rate than when it is performed, or even when it is performed, only one of the rattling motion and the weak downward motion may be performed.

(Preliminary decision table before reach)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a pre-reach announcement determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the pre-reach announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 59, the pre-reach advance notice determination table includes game state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (big hit determination result, hit determination result), variation production pattern , the selection rate (%) of each prediction pattern, and the prediction pattern to be selected are associated with each other.

There are 3 types of advance notice patterns: "no notice" in which the advance notice effect is not executed, "serif notice effect" in which the dialogue notice effect is executed, and "step-up notice effect" in which the step-up notice effect is executed. The type is set, and the expectation (here, the jackpot game is executed) that will result in an advantageous result for the player (the ratio of executing the vibration effect accompanying the above-mentioned pattern matching) is Production <It is a step-up notice production.

The first feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the pre-reach advance notice effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss, and the result is advantageous to the player. When a variable production pattern with a high expectation that is advantageous to the player is determined than when a variable production pattern with a low expectation is determined, the advance notice production before reach is executed. There are easy points. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for an advantageous result for the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the second feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 59, in the normal game state, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed. In the case of a reach-before notice effect (a dialogue notice effect that can execute a vibration effect with the effective period of the effect button 17, and a step-up notice effect that can execute a vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17). While both) can be executed, in the normal game state, when the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, the advance notice performance before reach It is not executed, that is, the execution of the pre-reach announcement effect is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As the third feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 59, in the normal game state, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed. In the case of a reach-before notice effect (a dialogue notice effect that can execute a vibration effect with the effective period of the effect button 17, and a step-up notice effect that can execute a vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17). While both of them) can be executed, when the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols (variable performance in which only the special symbols TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state, the advance notice performance before reach is not executed. , that is, the execution of the pre-reach announcement effect is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As the fourth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 59, in the normal game state, a variable effect (a variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the special symbol fluctuate) is executed. In this case, both the pre-reach announcement effect (the dialog announcement effect in which the vibration effect can be executed with the effective period of the effect button 17, and the step-up advance notice effect in which the vibration effect can be executed without the effective period of the effect button 17) ) can be executed, while in the time-saving gaming state, the variable performance (only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol fluctuates, only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable production in which the production pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern and the special pattern TZ fluctuate) is executed, the advance notice production before reach is not executed, that is, the advance notice production before reach There are some restrictions on execution. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. When it is executed, the degree of expectation that the result (jackpot, win) that is more advantageous to the player etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the degree of expectation (vibration effect associated with the above-mentioned pattern matching) that results in a more advantageous result (jackpot, win) for the player when the dialogue notice effect is executed than when the step-up notice effect is executed is executed, the ratio of execution of the vibration effect in the determined effect described later, etc.) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is varied, or the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol are varied. When the variable performance to be displayed is executed, the pre-reach notice performance may be executed, and in this case, the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state. It may be executed at a lower rate than the case, or even if it is executed, only one of the speech announcement effect and the step-up announcement effect may be executed.

Specifically, when the variable performance corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, the proportion of the pre-reach notice performance is lower than the fluctuation performance corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol. , and when the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol jackpot variation display is executed than the variation performance corresponding to the first special symbol jackpot variation display, the pre-reach notice performance is at a lower rate. Execute, and when the variable performance corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed, the advance notice performance before reach is executed at a lower rate than the fluctuation performance corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, It is preferable to execute the pre-reach pre-announcement performance at a lower rate when the variation performance corresponding to the winning variation display of the normal symbols is executed than the variation performance corresponding to the big winning variation display of the first special symbol.

(Dialogue notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a dialog announcement pattern determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the dialog announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 60, the dialogue notice pattern determination table includes game state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (jackpot determination result, hit determination result), variation effect pattern The type, the selection rate (%) of each line notice pattern, and the selected line notice pattern are associated, and for reference, the production configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, production content) of each line notice pattern is described. there is

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the speech announcement effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. It is an effect that displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. It should be noted that operation sound 1 is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal (white)" in the button state column means the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the effect button 17 emits light in white, which is expected to give a favorable result to the player.

The "effect content" indicates the content of the effect to be executed when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. indicates that there is

``Normal dialogue (black)'' in the dialog production mode column means that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black characters and that normal dialogue is output by voice. showing.
“Chance dialogue (black)” means that a chance dialogue with the possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black characters and the chance dialogue is output by voice.
“Reach lines (black)” indicates that the lines for which the ready-to-win effect is to be executed are displayed in black characters, and that the lines for reach are output by voice.
“Reach lines (red)” indicates that the ready-to-win lines for which the execution of the ready-to-win effect is confirmed are displayed in red characters, and the ready-to-win lines are output by voice.

“Hot lines (red)” indicates that hot lines that are highly expected to bring favorable results to the player are displayed in red characters, and that hot lines are output by voice.
“Extremely hot dialogue (gold)” means that an intensely hot dialogue that is highly expected to bring favorable results to the player is displayed in gold letters, and that intensely hot dialogue is output as a voice. ing.
“Fixed lines (rainbow)” indicates that a fixed line that confirms that the outcome will be advantageous to the player is displayed in rainbow colored characters, and that the fixed line is output by voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate 1 from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that a weak vibration production that vibrates weakly over a period of seconds is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the display of the dialogue (=when the production button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). This indicates that a vibrating strong vibration effect is to be executed.

The degree of expectation that results in an advantageous result for the player in each dialogue production mode (here, the jackpot game is executed) is "normal dialogue" < "chance dialogue (black)" < "ready dialogue (black)" < " Reach dialogue (red)” < “heat dialogue (red)” < “hot dialogue (gold)” < “fixed dialogue (rainbow)”. In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

As a first feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60, when a speech with a high degree of expectation (heat speech or higher) that will result in an advantageous result for the player is displayed, a vibration effect that vibrates the production button 17 is displayed. is executable. Therefore, it is possible to effectively let the player know that there is a high degree of expectation that an advantageous result will be obtained, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the dialog forewarning pattern determination table shown in FIG. Vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high) when the dialog forewarning effect of the hot dialogue is executed. There is a point that the player has a higher expectation that the result will be advantageous when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed than when the vibration performance of the button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue forewarning effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a speech with a high degree of expectation that will result in an advantageous result for the player (heat speech or higher) is displayed is relatively short. The point is that it is time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the degree of expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation can suggest the player's degree of expectation for an advantageous result, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fifth feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the vibration period of the effect button 17 during display of the speech image (1 second) is shorter than the display period of the speech image (3 seconds). is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of anticipation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of anticipation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the speech announcement effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed, or the vibration time of the weak vibration effect may be longer than the strong vibration effect. may be lengthened.

Also, the effective period is terminated by the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, and the dialogue forewarning effect is executed. You can choose not to run it.

In addition, although the effective period is generated to execute the dialogue forewarning effect, it is also possible to execute the dialogue forewarning effect without generating the effective period. Only weak vibration effect for 1 second or only strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used.

(Step-up notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding the notice pattern of the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 61, the step-up notice pattern determination table includes game state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (big hit determination result, hit determination result), variation effect The pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the step-up notice pattern to be selected are associated. ) is described.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first and second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the 1st to 4th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the 1st to 5th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order, the 4th step effect is skipped and the 5th step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at '5'" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the fifth step effect. indicates that it will be executed.

"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during execution of the step-up notice effect. This indicates that the production button 17 is turned off.

The degree of expectation that results in an advantageous result for the player in each step-up effect mode (here, the jackpot game is executed) is “1→2”<“1→2→3”<“1→2→3→ 4"<"1→2→3→4→5"<"1→2→3→5".

A first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is possible to execute the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 without generating the . Therefore, it is possible to effectively let the player know that there is a high degree of expectation that an advantageous result will be obtained, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that a vibration effect executed when a step effect (fifth step effect) with a high degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player is displayed is displayed. The point is that the time is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that there is only one predetermined type of vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration time) (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up notice performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the complication of the performance mode and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

A fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the period (1 second) is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of anticipation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of anticipation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 62, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table includes game state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (big hit determination result, hit determination result), variable effect The pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the pseudo-continuous effect pattern to be selected are associated. is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the pseudo continuous effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. It is an effect that displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 2 different from the operation sound 1 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
“Protruding button white” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal (white)" in the button state column means the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the effect button 17 emits light in white with a low degree of expectation, which is advantageous to the player. This indicates that the button 17 emits light in red, which is expected to result in favorable results for the player.

"Effect content" indicates the content of the effect related to the pseudo continuous effect, and "temporary stop period of pseudo continuous symbol 2 seconds" means that the period during which the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds, which will be described later. is shown.

"Pseudo-failure" in the column of the pseudo-continuous effect mode means that the central effect symbol 70a, which suggests the execution of the pseudo-continuous, is not temporarily stopped, and the normal effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and a failure sound effect is produced. This indicates that the pseudo consecutive failure effect to be output is executed.
"Pseudo-success" means that the central effect symbol 70a, which is a pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo-continuation, is temporarily stopped, a success effect sound is output, the second movable member 73b is weakly operated, and the pseudo-continuation effect is performed. It shows that the pseudo consecutive success effect to be performed is executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is temporarily stopped in the pseudo symbol (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for one second.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped (=when the production button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends). It shows that the strong vibration effect to be performed is executed.

The degree of expectation that will result in an advantageous result for the player of each promotion effect (here, the big winning game will be executed) is "normal button white"<"protruding button white". In addition, the degree of expectation that results are advantageous to the player in each button state is "normal" < "protruding". In addition, the degree of expectation that each vibration effect results in an advantageous result for the player is "weak vibration effect"<"strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A vibrating effect may be executed in which an effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively let the player know that there is a high degree of expectation that an advantageous result will be obtained, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of vibration intensities depending on the player's expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation can suggest the player's degree of expectation for an advantageous result, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There is a case where a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates the . Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fifth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the period (1 second) is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have expectations before the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance or the SPSP ready-to-win performance, but to prevent the players from having excessive expectations, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the sixth feature of the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed. In this case, it is possible to operate the production button 17 and simulate continuous production (a kind of operation production and vibration production) accompanied by vibration of the production button 17, while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display in the normal game state. When the corresponding variable performance (variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, the pseudo continuous performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the operation of the performance button 17 and the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect accompanied by the vibration of the effect button 17 is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As the seventh feature of the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed. In this case, it is possible to operate the production button 17 and simulate continuous production (a kind of operation production and vibration production) accompanied by vibration of the production button 17, while corresponding to the variable display of normal symbols in the normal game state. When a variable effect (a variable effect in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, the operation of the effect button 17 and the pseudo-continuous effect accompanied by the vibration of the effect button 17 are not executed, that is, the operation of the effect button 17 and the effect The point is that the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect accompanied by the vibration of the button 17 is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62, a variable effect (a variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the special symbol fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to operate the production button 17 and a pseudo-continuous production (a kind of operation production and vibration production) accompanied by the vibration of the production button 17. Variation effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to display fluctuates, variation effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern fluctuates, production pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern and special pattern TZ When the variable effect that fluctuates) is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect involving the operation of the effect button 17 and the vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed. The point is that the execution of the production is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the effect button 17 during the effective period may be in a protruding state when the simulated continuous success effect is performed in a variable effect pattern with a high degree of expectation that results in an advantageous result for the player. You can make it so that it doesn't.

In addition, although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the pseudo continuous success effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, although the effective period is generated to execute the pseudo consecutive success effect and the pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute the pseudo consecutive success effect and the pseudo consecutive failure effect without generating the effective period. Often, the vibration effect to be executed in the pseudo continuous success effect may be only 3 seconds of weak vibration effect or only 3 seconds of strong vibration effect, or only 1 second of weak vibration effect or only 1 second of strong vibration effect. can be

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is varied, or the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol are varied. When the variable performance to be displayed is executed, the pseudo continuous performance may be executed, and in this case, when the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state. should be run at a lower rate than

Specifically, the operation and performance of the production button 17 are better in the case where the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol loss variation display is executed than the variation performance corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol. A case where the pseudo-continuous performance accompanied by the vibration of the button 17 is executed at a low rate, and the variation performance corresponding to the big win variation display of the second special symbol is executed rather than the variation performance corresponding to the big win variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, the operation of the production button 17 and the pseudo-continuous production accompanied by the vibration of the production button 17 are executed at a lower rate, and the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed rather than the fluctuation production corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol. When the corresponding variable performance is executed, the pseudo continuous performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than the variable performance corresponding to the big hit variable display of the first special pattern. Also, when the variable performance corresponding to the winning variation display of the normal symbols is executed, it is preferable to execute the pseudo-continuous performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 at a lower rate.

(Development effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the development effect.

As shown in FIG. 63, the development effect pattern determination table includes game state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (jackpot determination result, hit determination result), and variable effect pattern. The type, the type of development for which the development pattern is determined, the selection rate (%) of each development pattern, and the development pattern to be selected are associated. production, effective period, production content) are described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"None" in the effective suggestive production column indicates that the effective suggestive production is not executed, and "Yes (gase)" means that the effective suggestive production is executed, but the effective period does not occur after that. "Yes" indicates that the effective suggestive effect is executed and then the valid period occurs.

The 'effective period (long press for 4 seconds)' indicates that the development effect progresses step by step by pressing the effect button 17 for a long time and that the effective period of the development effect ends when 4 seconds elapse.
The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 3 different from the operation sounds 1 and 2 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
“Normal button red” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal (white)" in the button state column means the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the effect button 17 emits light in white with a low degree of expectation, which is advantageous for the player. This indicates that the button 17 emits light in red, which is expected to result in favorable results for the player.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production related to the development production, and "development pattern temporary stop period 2 seconds" indicates that the period in which the development pattern described later is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds. ing.

"SP notification" in the column of the development mode means that as a result of the development mode, an SP development pattern is derived and displayed to suggest the development to the SP ready-to-win mode, and the SP development mode that outputs the first development effect sound is executed. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" means that as a result of the development production, an SPSP development pattern indicating development to the SPSP ready-to-win production is derived and displayed, and an SPSP development production that outputs a second development sound effect is executed. .
"Full spin notification" means that as a result of the development production, a full spin development pattern is derived and displayed to suggest development to a full spin reach production, and a full spin development production that outputs a third development effect sound is executed. is shown.

The "weak action" in the column of character action is a weak action production in which the second movable member 73b emits blue light and performs a weak action with a small movement width when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the effective period). is executed.
The "strong action" means that the second movable member 73b emits red light when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the valid period), and a strong action effect with a large swing width is executed. is shown.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time of derivation display of various development patterns (= the end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" refers to a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time various symbols are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The degree of expectation that results in each action effect being advantageous to the player (here, a jackpot game is executed) is "weak action"<"strong action". In addition, the degree of expectation that each vibration effect results in an advantageous result for the player is "weak vibration"<"strong vibration".

As the first feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. When SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, a vibrating effect may be executed in which the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively let the player know that there is a high degree of expectation that an advantageous result will be obtained, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that, compared with the case where the SPSP development effect is executed, there is a full-rotation development effect with a high degree of expectation that will result in a more advantageous result for the player than the SPSP development effect. When it is executed, the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is easier to be executed (execution rate is higher), and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed when the SPSP development performance is executed. The reason for this is that the player has a higher expectation of a favorable result when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the SPSP development performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. SPSP notification, full-rotation notification) is executed for a relatively short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, the variable effect pattern is highly expected to result in an advantageous result for the player. There are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration performance to be executed according to the player's expectation that the result will be advantageous. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation can suggest the player's degree of expectation for an advantageous result, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fifth feature of the development pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the temporary stop period of the development pattern (2 seconds) and the vibration period of the production button 17 during the temporary stop of the development pattern (2 seconds) are the same. Alternatively, the ratio of the difference between the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the development pattern and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the production button 17 is smaller than that of the pre-reach announcement production. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

As the sixth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, the operation of the production button 17, the action of the character object, and the development effect (a kind of operation effect, the action effect of the character object, and the vibration effect) involving the vibration of the effect button 17 can be executed. 2 When a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (variable effect in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, a development effect involving the operation of the effect button 17, the movement of the role item, and the vibration of the effect button 17 is performed. The point is that it is not executed, that is, the execution of the development production accompanying the operation of the production button 17, the movement of the character object, and the vibration of the production button 17 is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As the seventh feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, the operation of the production button 17, the action of the character object, and the development effect (a kind of operation effect, the action effect of the character object, and the vibration effect) involving the vibration of the effect button 17 can be executed. When the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the pattern (the variable performance in which only the special pattern TZ fluctuates) is executed, the development performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17, the action of the performance button 17, and the vibration of the performance button 17 are not executed. That is, the operation of the production button 17, the action of the character object, and the execution of the development production involving the vibration of the production button 17 are restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

The eighth characteristic of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that in the normal game state, the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable effect in which the special symbol fluctuates) is executed. In the case, the operation of the production button 17, the action of the role object, and the development production (a kind of operation production, the action production of the role object, and the vibration production) involving the vibration of the production button 17 can be executed, while the variable production in the time-saving game state (Variation effect in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol fluctuates, Variation effect in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol fluctuates, Production corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol When the variable effect in which the pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ fluctuate) is executed, the operation of the effect button 17, the operation of the character object, and the development effect accompanied by the vibration of the effect button 17 are not executed, that is, the operation of the effect button 17 , and the execution of the development effect involving the movement of the role object and the vibration of the effect button 17 is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the development effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is varied, or the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol are varied. When the variable production to be displayed is executed, the development production accompanied by the operation of the production button 17, the movement of the performance button 17, and the vibration of the production button 17 may be executed. It is preferable to execute the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of one special symbol at a lower rate than when the variable performance is executed.

Specifically, the operation and role of the production button 17 are better when the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol loss variation display is executed than the variation performance corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol. Developing performance accompanied by object action and vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a low rate, and the variable performance corresponding to the big win variation display of the second special symbol is executed rather than the variation performance corresponding to the big win variation display of the first special symbol. In the case where it is performed, the operation of the production button 17, the action of the role product, and the development production accompanied by the vibration of the production button 17 are executed at a low rate, and the fluctuation production corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the first special pattern is normal. In the case where the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the loss of the pattern is executed, the development performance accompanying the operation of the performance button 17, the action of the performance button 17, and the vibration of the performance button 17 are executed at a lower rate, and the first special symbol is displayed. When the variation performance corresponding to the winning variation display of the normal pattern is executed, the development performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the performance button 17, and the vibration of the performance button 17 is more advanced than the variation performance corresponding to the big win variation display. should be run at a lower rate.

(Cut-in effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 64, the cut-in effect pattern determination table includes game state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (big hit determination result, hit determination result), variable effect The pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the cut-in effect pattern to be selected are associated. is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the cut-in effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 4 different from the operation sounds 1 to 3 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
“Protruding button rainbow” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "Normal (white)" is the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude and the effect button 17 is in a normal state. emits white light that is less likely to result in favorable results for the player. "Protrusion (red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a projecting state, and that the effect button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected to give a favorable result to the player. "Protrusion (rainbow)" means that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color that confirms that the result will be advantageous to the player.

"Effect content" indicates the content of the effect executed when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or when the effective period elapses. This indicates that the image display period is 3 seconds.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column indicates that a cut-in image in a blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a first cut-in effect sound is output. It indicates that
“Green cut-in” indicates that a cut-in image in a green frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a green cut-in effect is executed in which a second cut-in effect sound is output. .
"Red cut-in" indicates that a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a red cut-in effect is executed in which a third cut-in effect sound is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column is when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (=when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends) It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for three seconds from .
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 lasts for 3 seconds from the time the cut-in image starts to be displayed (=when the production button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that a strong vibration effect is executed in which strong vibration is performed.

The degree of expectation that results are advantageous to the player at each cut-in is "blue cut-in"<"green cut-in"<"red cut-in". In addition, the degree of expectation that each vibration effect results in an advantageous result for the player is "weak vibration effect"<"strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that when a cut-in image with a high degree of expectation that will result in an advantageous result for the player is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed), the effect button 17 is pressed. vibrating the effect button 17 by generating an effective period of . Therefore, it is possible to effectively let the player know that there is a high degree of expectation that an advantageous result will be obtained, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is vibration that is executed when a cut-in image with a high degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player is displayed (cut-in effect is executed). The point is that the production takes a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively let the player know that there is a high degree of expectation that an advantageous result will be obtained, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, a vibration that is executed when a cut-in image with a high degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed) is displayed. The point is that there are two types of vibration intensity of the effect according to the degree of expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation can suggest the player's degree of expectation for an advantageous result, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the cut-in image display period (3 seconds) and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the effect button 17 during display of the cut-in image are the same. (the ratio of the difference between the cut-in image display period (3 seconds) and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the effect button 17 is smaller than the pre-reach announcement effect). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed. In this case, the operation of the production button 17 and the cut-in production (a kind of operation production and vibration production) accompanied by the vibration of the production button 17 can be executed, while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display in the normal game state. When the corresponding variable production (variable production in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, the operation of the production button 17 and the cut-in production accompanied by the vibration of the production button 17 are not executed, that is, the operation of the production button 17 Execution of the cut-in effect accompanied by the vibration of the effect button 17 is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed. In this case, a cut-in effect (a kind of operation effect or vibration effect) accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 and the vibration of the effect button 17 can be executed, while the variable display of the normal symbols is supported in the normal game state. When a variable effect (a variable effect in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, the cut-in effect accompanying the operation of the effect button 17 and the vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed, that is, the operation of the effect button 17 and the effect Execution of the cut-in effect with vibration of the button 17 is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, a variable effect (a variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the special symbol fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, the operation of the production button 17 and the cut-in production (a kind of operation production and vibration production) accompanied by the vibration of the production button 17 can be executed. Variation effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to display fluctuates, variation effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern fluctuates, production pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern and special pattern TZ When the variable effect that fluctuates is executed, the cut-in effect accompanying the operation of the effect button 17 and the vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed, that is, the cut-in effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 and the vibration of the effect button 17 The point is that the execution of the production is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

Also, although the effective period is generated and the cut-in effect is executed, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating the effective period. Only weak vibration effects for 3 seconds or only strong vibration effects for 3 seconds may be used, or only weak vibration effects for 1 second or only strong vibration effects for 1 second may be used.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is varied, or the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol are varied. When the variable production to be displayed is executed, the cut-in production accompanied by the operation of the production button 17 and the vibration of the production button 17 may be executed. It is preferable to execute at a lower rate than when the variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of is executed.

Specifically, the operation and performance of the production button 17 are better in the case where the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol loss variation display is executed than the variation performance corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol. When the cut-in performance accompanied by the vibration of the button 17 is executed at a low rate, and the variation performance corresponding to the big win variation display of the second special symbol is executed rather than the variation performance corresponding to the big win variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, the operation of the production button 17 and the cut-in production accompanied by the vibration of the production button 17 are executed at a lower rate, and the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed rather than the fluctuation production corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol. When the corresponding variable performance is executed, the cut-in performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than the variable performance corresponding to the big win variable display of the first special symbol. Also, it is preferable to execute the cut-in performance accompanying the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 at a lower rate when the variation performance corresponding to the winning variation display of the normal symbol is executed.

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the determined effect.

As shown in FIG. 65, the decided effect pattern determination table includes game state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (big hit determination result, hit determination result), variable effect pattern The type, the selection rate (%) of each decided production pattern, and the decided production pattern to be selected are associated, and for reference, the production configuration of each decided production pattern (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) is described. there is

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 5 different from the operation sounds 1 to 4 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
“Protruding button rainbow” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "Normal (white)" is the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude and the effect button 17 is in a normal state. emits white light that is less likely to result in favorable results for the player. "Protrusion (red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a projecting state, and that the effect button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected to give a favorable result to the player. "Protrusion (rainbow)" means that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color that confirms that the result will be advantageous to the player.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that is executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or the valid period has passed. )” indicates that the execution period of the effect related to the decided success effect during the normal game state is 11 seconds, and that the execution period of the effect related to the determined success effect during the time saving game state is 5 seconds. .

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, which is a determination that suggests that the result is not advantageous to the player (the jackpot game or the auxiliary game is not executed). It indicates that a failure effect will be executed.
“Success” means that the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the result is advantageous to the player (the jackpot game or the auxiliary game is executed). indicates that it will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration is determined by the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17. It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the hour) and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.
"Strong vibration (4 seconds)" in the column of button vibration is determined by the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17. It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) of strongly vibrating for 4 seconds is executed.

"Strong action" in the column of role product action indicates that the first movable member 73a operates to the maximum action position and emits light in rainbow colors.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is determined from the start of the successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the effect button 17 strongly vibrates).
"Rainbow light emission (5 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is determined from the start of the successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that the rainbow light is emitted for 5 seconds (longer period than the effect button 17 strongly vibrates).

The degree of expectation that results are advantageous to the player for each promotion effect is "normal button white"<"protruding button red"<"protruding button rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation that results are advantageous to the player in each button state is "normal" < "protruding".

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that, when a successful fixed effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which an effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game or the auxiliary game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 generated during the variable effect is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the effect button 17 can be vibrated for the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect occurring during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the effect button 17 emits rainbow light for a longer period than the vibrating period of the effect button 17 . Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed. In this case, it is possible to execute the operation of the production button 17, the vibration of the production button 17, and the decision production (a kind of operation production, vibration production, and role product operation production) involving the operation of the production button 17, and the second in the normal game state. 2 When the variable production corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern (the variable production in which only the special pattern TZ fluctuates) is executed, the operation of the production button 17 and the vibration of the production button 17 and the action of the accessory are performed. The point is that it is not executed, that is, the operation of the production button 17, the vibration of the production button 17, and the execution of the decision production involving the action of the character object are restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed. In this case, it is possible to execute the operation of the production button 17, the vibration of the production button 17, and the decision production (a kind of operation production, vibration production, and role product operation production) accompanied by the operation of the production button 17, while the normal game state is normal. When the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the pattern (the variable performance in which only the special pattern TZ fluctuates) is executed, the operation of the performance button 17, the vibration of the performance button 17, and the determination performance accompanying the action of the accessory are not executed. In other words, the operation of the production button 17, the vibration of the production button 17, and the execution of the decision production involving the movement of the character object are restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As the seventh feature of the decided production pattern determination table shown in FIG. The operation of the production button 17, the vibration of the production button 17, and the decision production (a kind of operation production, vibration production, and role product operation production) involving the operation of the production button 17 and the performance of the production button 17 are not executed, that is, the operation of the production button 17 and the vibration of the production button 17 While the execution of the decided performance with the role product operation is restricted, in the time saving game state, when the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal design (variable performance in which the performance design 70a and the special design TZ fluctuate) is executed is that the operation of the production button 17, the vibration of the production button 17, and the decision production involving the action of the character object can be executed. By doing so, in a time-saving gaming state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit to the right, the normal pattern variation display (normal pattern variation performance) performed by the game ball winning the normal pattern gate 44 can be promoted, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As the eighth characteristic of the decided production pattern determination table shown in FIG. The operation of the production button 17, the vibration of the production button 17, and the decision production (a kind of operation production, vibration production, and role product operation production) involving the operation of the production button 17 and the performance of the production button 17 are not executed, that is, the operation of the production button 17 and the vibration of the production button 17 While the execution of the decided performance with the role product operation is restricted, in the time saving game state, when the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal design (variable performance in which the performance design 70a and the special design TZ fluctuate) is executed is that the operation of the production button 17, the vibration of the production button 17, and the decision production involving the action of the character object can be executed. By doing so, in a time-saving gaming state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit to the right, the normal pattern variation display (normal pattern variation performance) performed by the game ball winning the normal pattern gate 44 can be promoted, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the determination effect (determined success effect), the action effect using the first movable member 73a is executed, but the action effect using the second movable member 73b may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio of the action effect using the first movable member 73a higher than that of the action effect using the second movable member 73b.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable effect is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is changed, the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, and the action of the accessory are performed. A fixed performance may be executed, and in this case, it is preferable to execute it at a lower rate than when the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols is executed in the time-saving game state.

Specifically, the operation of the production button 17 and the production button 17 are better when the variation production corresponding to the second special symbol loss fluctuation display is executed than the fluctuation production corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol. , and when the variation performance corresponding to the second special pattern big hit variation display is executed rather than the variation performance corresponding to the normal pattern hit variation display. However, it is preferable to execute the decision production involving the operation of the production button 17, the vibration of the production button 17, and the movement of the accessory at a lower rate.

(Re-lottery effect pattern decision table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the re-lottery effect pattern determination table, game state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), presence or absence of promotion (whether promotion is planned), each re-lottery The selection rate (%) of the production pattern and the re-lottery production pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each re-lottery production pattern is described for reference.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the re-lottery effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggesting effect. Along with this, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed. It should be noted that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 6 different from the operation sounds 1 to 5 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
“Normal button red” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
"Normal button rainbow" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal (white)" in the button state column means the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the effect button 17 emits white light with a low promotion expectation. "Normal (red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude, and the effect button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected for promotion. "Normal (rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color indicating confirmation of promotion.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that is executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period elapses. It indicates that the performance execution period is 4 seconds.

"Promotion failure" in the re-lottery effect mode column means that a non-promoted pattern that does not result in a favorable result for the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even number pattern → even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → "7 ”) are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and an effect is performed in which a non-promoted sound effect is output.
“Successful promotion” means that promotion patterns (for example, even-numbered symbols → odd-numbered symbols, odd-numbered symbols other than “7” → “7” symbols) that result in an advantageous result for the player as a result of the re-lottery effect are derived and displayed (temporary stop), and an effect of outputting a promotion sound effect is performed.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the promotion pattern is displayed (= the end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration effect to be performed is executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is displayed for 4 seconds (when the effect button 17 It shows rainbow emission over a longer period of time than strong oscillation.

The degree of expectation that results are advantageous to the player for each promotion effect is "normal button white"<"normal button red"<"normal button rainbow".

A first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that when the promotion success effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which the effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player that the game has been promoted to an advantageous result, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a third feature of the re-lottery production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66, a variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special design in the normal game state (variation production in which the production design 70a and the special design TZ fluctuate) is executed. In this case, it is possible to operate the production button 17 and re-lottery production (a kind of operation production and vibration production) accompanied by vibration of the production button 17, while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display in the normal game state. When the corresponding variable production (variable production in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, the operation of the production button 17 and the re-lottery production accompanied by the vibration of the production button 17 are not executed, that is, the operation of the production button 17. and the execution of the re-lottery effect accompanied by the vibration of the effect button 17 is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the re-lottery production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66, a variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (variation production in which the production design 70a and the special design TZ fluctuate) is executed. In this case, a re-lottery performance (a kind of operation performance or vibration performance) accompanied by operation of the performance button 17 and vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, while corresponding to the variable display of normal symbols in the normal game state. When the variable performance (variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, the operation of the performance button 17 and the re-lottery performance accompanied by the vibration of the performance button 17 are not executed, that is, the operation of the performance button 17 and the performance Execution of the re-lottery effect with vibration of the button 17 is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the variable display of the first special symbol (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable effect) and improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66, a variable effect (a variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the special symbol fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, the operation of the production button 17 and the re-lottery production (a kind of operation production and vibration production) accompanied by the vibration of the production button 17 can be executed. Variation effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to display fluctuates, variation effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern fluctuates, production pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern and special pattern TZ When the variable performance that fluctuates is executed, the re-lottery performance with the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the re-lottery with the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17. The point is that the execution of the production is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the re-lottery performance (promotion failure performance, promotion success performance) is executed by generating the validity period, but the re-lottery performance may be executed without generating the validity period.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is varied, or the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol are varied. When the variable performance to be displayed is executed, a re-lottery performance with operation of the performance button 17 and vibration of the performance button 17 may be executed, and in this case, the first special symbol in the normal game state. It is preferable that the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of is executed at a lower or higher rate than when the variable presentation is executed.

Specifically, the operation and performance of the production button 17 are better in the case where the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol loss variation display is executed than the variation performance corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol. A re-lottery performance accompanied by vibration of the button 17 is executed at a low rate or a high rate, and the variation performance corresponding to the big win variation display of the second special symbol is executed rather than the variation performance corresponding to the big win variation display of the first special symbol. When it is performed, the re-lottery performance with the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a low rate or a high rate, and the variable performance corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the first special pattern is normal. In the case where the variable performance corresponding to the change display of the loss of the pattern is executed, the re-lottery performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a low rate or a high rate, and the first special pattern is displayed. The ratio of the re-lottery performance accompanying the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 is lower when the variation performance corresponding to the winning variation display of the normal pattern is executed than the variation performance corresponding to the big winning variation display. Or run at a higher rate.

Further, when the first big winning game having a lower degree of advantage for the player than the second big winning game or the third big winning game is executed, the variation performance corresponding to the big winning variation display of the first special symbol is executed. makes it possible to execute a re-lottery effect, and when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start port 47 is opened in a short opening pattern that is less advantageous to the player than in an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern. The lottery effect may not be executed.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66)
Here, as a first feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. It is possible to execute a suggested predetermined notice effect (for example, determined effect, etc.), and when the normal symbol variable display (second variable display) is executed during the normal game state (first game state), a predetermined notice Execution of production (for example, decision production, etc.) is limited, and when fluctuation display (second fluctuation display) of normal symbols is executed during the time saving game state (second game state), a predetermined notice production (for example, decision production, etc.) can be executed.By doing this, the production effect in the time-saving game state (second game state) in which it is important to execute the variable display of normal symbols is improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that the movable members (the first movable member 73a, the second movable member 73b, etc.) are moved during the normal symbol variation display (the second variation display). It is possible to execute an action effect (for example, a successful action, etc.) that makes an action (strong action, weak action, rattling action) in a predetermined mode, and a normal symbol fluctuation display (first game state) during the normal game state (first game state) 2 variable display) is executed, the execution of action effects (for example, success action, etc.) is restricted, and the normal symbol variable display (second variable display) is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state). When it is done, it is pointed out that it is possible to execute an action effect (for example, a successful action, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state (second game state) in which it is important to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

As a third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66, a predetermined operation effect (for example, When the variable display (second variable display) of the normal symbols is executed during the normal game state (first game state), the operation effect (for example, the determined effect etc.) can be executed. It is limited, and when the variable display of normal symbols (second variable display) is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state), it is possible to execute an operation effect (for example, a decision effect, etc.). be done. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state (second game state) in which it is important to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

As a fourth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol has an advantageous result for the player (jackpot determination result) (for example, a special effect such as "BONUS approaching" display is performed) can be executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol during the normal game state (first game state) When executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state) in which a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, a special effect such as "BONUS approaching" display is performed) can be executed. When it is performed, the execution of a predetermined notice effect (for example, a special effect in which "BONUS is approaching" is displayed) is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the second special symbols are displayed in a variable manner depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66, movable members (first movable member 73a, first 2 movable member 73b, etc.) operation production (for example, determined success production, etc.) and the movable member (first movable member 73a, second 2 movable member 73b) can be made the same as the action in the motion effect (for example, the winning effect, etc.). By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the execution of the action presentation is highly likely to result in an advantageous result for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

As a sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66, a predetermined operation effect (for example, a determined effect etc.) to operate the effect button 17 (operation means) when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed ) can be executed, and the effect button 17 can be vibrated in a predetermined mode when a predetermined operation effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the predetermined operation performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66, when the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the normal game state, a vibration effect (for example, , Vibration effects related to determined success effects, etc.) are limited, but when the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the time-saving game state, vibration effects that vibrate the production button 17 in a predetermined manner (for example, Vibration production etc. related to decision success production) can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state (second game state) in which it is important to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

As the eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. , the number of types of vibration effects of the effect button 17 executed when the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the time-saving game state is less. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state and to avoid the inconvenience that the production effect is poor even when the variable display of the normal symbols is executed during the time-saving game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. The number of types of expectations in a predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, winning lighting effect) that suggests in advance the result of the variable display of normal symbols in the time-saving game state is more than the number of types of expectations in the effect). There are few points. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state and to avoid the inconvenience that the production effect is poor even when the variable display of the normal symbols is executed during the time-saving game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66, during the time saving game state, a predetermined look-ahead effect that suggests in advance the result of the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, a winning light emission effect ), the number of types of expectations in a predetermined look-ahead effect (for example, lighting effect at the time of winning) that suggests in advance the result of the variable display of normal symbols is greater than the number of types of expectations. be done. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state in which the variable display of the normal symbols necessary for generating the second reserved memory is important, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

As the eleventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state, a predetermined operation effect (eg, decision effect etc.) is executed. It is possible, it is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in a predetermined mode when a predetermined operation effect is executed, and a predetermined operation when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state. Vibration mode (4 seconds vibration → 5 seconds vibration) of the production button 17 in the production (for example, decision production etc.), and a predetermined operation when the fluctuation display of normal symbols is executed during the time saving game state (for example, decision production etc.) can be made different from the vibration mode (4-second vibration) of the effect button 17. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the operation performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the operation production (for example, decision success production, etc.) of the movable member (the first movable member 73a, the second movable member 73b, etc.) executed when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state , and the action effect (for example, success effect etc.) of the movable member (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) executed when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed during the time saving game state You may make it differ from operation|movement. In this way, it is possible to make the presentation effect of the action presentation different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, the vibration mode of the production button 17 in a predetermined operation production (for example, decision production etc.) when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state, and the variable display of the normal symbol during the time saving game state When is executed, the vibration mode of the effect button 17 in a predetermined operation effect (for example, decision effect, etc.) may be the same. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that there is a high possibility that the result will be advantageous, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the time-saving game state than the number of types of vibration performance of the performance button 17 executed when the variable display of the first special symbols is executed during the normal game state. The number of types of vibration effects of the effect button 17 to be executed may be increased. By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect in the time-saving game state which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as an icon display mode in the icon change effect that suggests in advance the result of the variable display of the first special symbol during the normal game state, it is suggested that a specific effect (pseudo continuous effect, SP ready-to-win effect) will be executed. On the other hand, as a display mode of the icon in the icon change effect that suggests in advance the result of the variable display of the normal symbols during the time saving game state, a specific effect (pseudo continuous effect, SP reach effect) is provided. It is also possible not to provide a specific display mode to suggest execution. By doing so, the production effect in the normal game state can be effectively improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Third time-saving effect processing of the effect control unit)
The third time-saving system effect processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the third time-saving system effect processing in the effect control unit 130m.

First, in step E750-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the game is currently in the time saving game state. If it is not in the time-saving game state, the process is moved to step E750-2, and if it is in the time-saving game state, the third time-saving effect (RWM clear described later is not performed (is stationary) This third time-saving system performance processing is terminated assuming that the suggested RWM clear denial performance and the activation counter display suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until transition to the special time-saving game state) are not executed.

In step E750-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol has been started. When the variation production corresponding to the special design is not started, the process is moved to step E750-16, and when the variation production corresponding to the special design is started, in step E750-3, RWM when the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not clearing has been performed (whether or not a power-on designation command has been received). If the RWM clear has been performed, the process proceeds to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not executed, and if the RWM clear has been performed, the process proceeds to step E750-4.

In step E750-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a history of a jackpot game being executed from when the power was turned on to the present (whether or not a jackpot game was executed on the current day). If there is a history of big wins, the process is moved to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not executed, and if there is no history of big wins, the process is moved to step E750-5.

In step E750-5, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations until transition to the third time-saving gaming state is within a predetermined number (here, 100 times). If it is not within the predetermined number, the third time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect, activation counter display) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step E750-16, and if it is within the predetermined number, step E750-6. to process.

In step E750-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special symbol after the power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the first number (here, 50 times). . When the number of fluctuations of the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol is not the first number, the process is shifted to step E750-10, and when the number of fluctuations of the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol is the first number, step E750. At -7, whether or not to execute the RWM clear denial effect and whether or not to display the activation counter are determined by lottery (for example, a ratio of 1/2).

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E750-8 whether or not it is decided to execute the RWM clear negative effect or the activation counter display. If it is determined not to execute the RWM clear denial effect or activation counter display, the process is shifted to step E750-16, and if it is determined to execute the RWM clear denial effect or activation counter display, step E750-9. , the effect execution command corresponding to the determination result is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, an effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the third time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect and/or activation counter display) is performed. .

In step E750-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special symbols after the power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the second number (here, 100 times). . If the number of fluctuations of the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol is not the second number, the process is moved to step E750-16, and if the number of fluctuations of the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol is the second number, RWM is cleared. It determines whether or not to execute a negative effect and whether or not to display an activation counter. Specifically, when the RWM clear denial effect has not been executed, it is decided to execute the RWM clear denial effect, and when the display of the activation counter has not been executed, it is determined to execute the display of the activation counter.

The sub CPU 130a sets an effect execution command corresponding to the determination result in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, an effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the third time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect and/or activation counter display) is performed. .

In step E750-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special symbol after the power is turned on is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special symbol is the second number, the process is moved to step E750-15, and if the number of fluctuations is not the second number, in step E750-14, from the time saving game state It is determined whether or not the production mode A has been entered. If the time-saving game state is shifted to the production mode A, the process is shifted to step E750-15, and if the time-saving game state is not shifted to the production mode A, the process is shifted to step E750-16.

The sub CPU 130a sets the activation counter display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in step E750-15. As a result, an effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the third time-saving effect (here, display of the activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect symbol has been stop-displayed (whether or not the special symbol confirmation command has been received). If the effect symbol is stop-displayed, the process is moved to step E750-17, and if the effect symbol is not stop-displayed, this third time-saving system effect process is ended.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E750-17 whether or not the activation counter is currently being displayed. If the activation counter is not being displayed, this third time-saving effect processing is terminated, and if the activation counter is being displayed, in step E750-18, the activation counter subtraction command is sent to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. set. As a result, an activation counter subtraction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for subtracting the value of the activation counter is performed. After completing this process, the current third time-saving production process is terminated.

In this way, during the execution of the variable effect for the predetermined number of times (before the third time-saving game state is activated), the RWM clear (clearing the number of variations) is executed when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute an RWM clear denial effect suggesting that there is no (deferred). Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the third time-saving game state occurs with reference to the number of fluctuations of the previous day, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a plurality of execution timings of the RWM clear denial effect are set, and if executed at any timing, it will not be executed again at other timings. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation with respect to the timing at which the RWM clear denial effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to display an activation counter suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until the transition to the third time-saving game state (execution of activation countdown effect is possible). Therefore, the player can grasp the time when the third time-saving game state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the activation counter is not displayed from the time when the power is turned on (irrespective of whether or not the RWM is cleared) until the variable effect is executed a predetermined number of times (minimum 50 times, maximum 100 times). Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether or not the RWM clear is not executed for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on at the start of the business hours of the amusement arcade. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience of a decrease in In addition, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation regarding whether or not the game is stationary, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, during the time-saving game state, the activation counter is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player's consciousness is directed to the third time-saving game state even in the time-saving game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even if the time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state, the activation counter is not displayed until the game is shifted to the production mode A.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to leave a lingering impression that the time-saving game state has shifted to the normal game state, and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, by displaying the activation counter display after shifting to the production mode A, it is possible to make the player head for a new game and improve the interest in the game.

Also, not at the start of the variable effect where the notice effect and the look-ahead effect are likely to be executed (started), but when the effect pattern stops (countdown) where the notice effect and the look-ahead effect are less likely to be executed (started) ), it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the power supply stopped during the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the occurrence of the power interruption, RWM related to the presence or absence of RWM clear after that While it is possible to execute a clear negative effect (specific effect), the power supply that was stopped during the normal game state after the end of the third time reduction game state is resumed, and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power failure. When the state is restored, the execution of the RWM clear denial effect (specific effect) related to the presence or absence of RWM clear is restricted thereafter. Therefore, the presence or absence of the RWM clear denial effect can inform the player of the useful information that the third time-saving game state has ended and the presence or absence of the RWM clear, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, the power supply generated when any of the production modes (production modes A to D, countdown mode) is controlled in the normal game state is resumed, and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power failure. In the case of doing, it is controlled to the production mode A which is the initial production mode, but the power supply stopped when it is controlled to the production mode (normal game state) other than the production mode A after the end of the time saving game state. When the game is resumed and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the occurrence of the power failure and is controlled to the performance mode A, after that, the RWM clear denial performance (specific performance) relating to the presence or absence of the RWM clear is executed. While it is possible, the power supply stopped when it is controlled in a production mode (normal game state) other than production mode A after the end of the third time-saving game state is resumed, and the control state of the game is turned off. When the state before the occurrence is recovered and the effect mode A is controlled, execution of the RWM clear negative effect (specific effect) related to the presence or absence of the RWM clear after that is restricted. Therefore, the presence or absence of the RWM clear denial effect can inform the player of the useful information that the third time-saving game state has ended and the presence or absence of the RWM clear, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Instead of subtracting (counting down) the activation counter at the time of stopping the performance pattern, the subtraction (counting down) of the activation counter may be performed at the start of the variable performance. In this case, the effect pattern 70a may start to fluctuate and the activation counter may be decremented until it completely shifts to high-speed fluctuation (becomes constant speed), or fluctuation such as floating in the effect pattern in the variable effect. The scrolling (fluctuation) may be performed after the pre-movement is performed, and the activation counter may be decremented before the pre-variation movement is completed.

In addition, instead of executing the RWM clear denial effect that suggests that the RWM clear (clearing the number of fluctuations) has not been executed (deferred), It is possible to execute a setting change suggesting effect suggesting that the game has been completed, or both the RWM clear denial effect and the setting change suggesting effect may be executed by lottery. However, it is preferable to limit the performance of both the RWM clear denial effect and the setting change suggestion effect in the same variable effect.

(Example of production when waiting for customers during normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of an example of an effect in the case of a customer waiting state during a normal game state. In this embodiment, the special symbols TZ displayed on the first image display device 70 include a first special symbol TZ1 corresponding to the first special symbol, a second special symbol TZ2 corresponding to the second special symbol, A third special symbol TZ3 corresponding to the normal symbol is set.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the change time of the first special symbol to be lost elapses, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with the losing number ("134"), and the icon display area 70C. The icon TI corresponding to the first special symbol displayed in .

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(b), when the stop time of the first special symbol elapses, the customer waits. , an adjustment guide image CA for guiding the operation of adjusting the sound volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 is displayed using a cross key image imitating the cross key 19 and a character image.

After that, when the game ball enters the general pattern gate 44 and the variable display of normal patterns is started, as shown in FIG. A variable effect (game effect) in which the third special symbol TZ3 is variably displayed is started. At this time, since the variable display of normal symbols is started in the normal game state, the customer waiting state is maintained and the display of the adjustment guidance image CA continues.

Then, when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. Waiting demonstration production is started. Specifically, the customer waiting demonstration image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the help time indicating that the game machine is equipped with a coined word "help time" that indicates the third time-saving game state. A guide image AN is displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable performance of the first special symbol TZ1 is executed without executing the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, and the variation of the second special symbol is performed. During the display or during the variable display of the normal design, since the variable performance with the variable display of the performance design 70a is executed, the variable display of the second special design and the variable display of the normal design are not executed. state. Then, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting state is maintained and the customer waiting production (display of adjustment guidance image CA, customer waiting demonstration production, help time guidance image AN display, etc.) will be executed.

In this way, in the normal game state (production modes A to D), when the variable display of normal symbols is executed, the customer waiting production (display of adjustment guidance image CA, customer waiting demonstration production, help time guidance image AN, etc.) can be executed, while in the time-saving gaming state, the execution of the customer waiting effect is limited when the variable display of normal symbols is being executed. Therefore, the waiting-for-customer effect can be executed at an appropriate timing in accordance with the effect situation on the first image display device 70, and the intended appealing effect can be exhibited to the player.

In addition, in the normal game state (production modes A to D), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the customer waiting production (display of the adjustment guidance image CA, customer waiting demonstration production, help time guidance Display of image AN, etc.) is restricted, and in the time-saving game state, it is possible to execute a waiting-for-customer effect when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. Therefore, the waiting-for-customer effect can be executed at an appropriate timing in accordance with the effect situation on the first image display device 70, and the intended appealing effect can be exhibited to the player.

In addition, in the normal game state (production modes A to D), even when the customer waiting production is being executed, the customer waiting production (display of adjustment guidance image CA, customer waiting demonstration production, help time Without interrupting the display of the guide image AN, etc.), it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the third special symbol TZ3 corresponding to the normal symbol. Therefore, the player does not have to be conscious of the variable display of normal symbols, which are not regarded as important in the normal game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Example of effect when prefetch effect is executed during normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 69, an effect example when the look-ahead effect is executed during the normal game state will be described. Here, it is assumed that the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the game ball enters the first starting port 45 during the variable display (execution of the variable effect) of the first special symbol that is lost, and the first reserve memory changes from "1" to " 2", a winning command (first reservation number designation command, first special figure prefetch designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130, and the number of the first reservation number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and a white icon (suspended icon HI ) is additionally displayed.

Next, when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("814"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI that has been displayed is erased.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that becomes a loss is started, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is performed. is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are directed to the icon display area 70C , and the top one is displayed as the icon TI.

At this time, the icon change effect is started, and the pending icon shift-displayed on the first display portion 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Further, the look-ahead zone effect is started, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and a blue zone image ZG is displayed.

Next, when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 69(d), the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("531"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI that has been displayed is erased.

After that, when the stopping time elapses and the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, as shown in FIG. 69(e), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1. is started, the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C It is displayed as the icon TI and changes to a red icon (special icon).

At this time, when the game ball enters the general pattern gate 44 and the variable display of the normal pattern is started, the variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern (the production pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 are variable display In parallel with the variable performance to be performed), a variable performance (game performance) in which the third special symbol TZ3 is variably displayed without being accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 69(f), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a state where the ready-to-win effect is formed, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has passed, the development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. The icon display area 70C is hidden (erased), and the look-ahead zone effect is interrupted. Further, when the change time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed with the losing number ("243").

Then, when it comes to the final phase of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (execution timing of the effect of deciding whether to lose or not), the decision success effect is started, and the effect of the ally character C2 launching a final attack on the enemy character C3 is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and an effect image SED indicating that the result is advantageous to the player is displayed, and the voice output device is displayed. 9 outputs a notification sound of "kyuin kyuin" (here, it is notified that a big win will be made).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the determined success production ends, as shown in FIG. At "555"), the game is temporarily stopped, the look-ahead zone effect is restarted, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed.

After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 69(j), the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a special result ("555") common to the small hit and the big hit. , the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a winning number ("555") that does not include "V" indicating a small winning. Further, when the look-ahead zone effect ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change effect ends.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, it is determined that the final phase of the SPSP ready-to-win performance (execution timing of the performance for determining whether or not it is a failure) is reached, and the failure performance is started and the friend character C2 becomes the enemy character. A production that loses to C3 is performed. After that, when a character screen of "defeat" is displayed to inform that the player has failed and the failure performance is completed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed with a reach-losing result (for example, "565"). become.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern reservation memory (F) increases, the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 When winning command (normal pattern reservation number designation command, General pattern prefetch designation command) is transmitted, but when the game ball wins the general pattern gate 44 during the normal game state and the general pattern reservation storage (F) increases, the general pattern reservation number display area 70G The number is increased and updated, but since the normal pattern pending icon is not additionally displayed, the normal pattern pending icon change effect is not executed.

In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 and the second reservation memory (U2) increases, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 receives a winning command (second reservation number designation command , second special figure prefetch designation command) is transmitted, but when the game ball wins in the second start port 47 during the normal game state and the second reservation memory (U2) increases, the second reservation number Although the number in the display area 70F is increased and updated, the pending icon is not additionally displayed, so the pending icon change effect is not executed.

In this way, when a big win is achieved in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectations of the player when the jackpot game is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the game ball wins (the first acquisition condition is satisfied) in the first start port 45 during the normal game state (first game state), the first effect display ( For example, a look-ahead effect such as an icon change effect) and a second effect display (holding number display in the pending icon display area or the pending number display area) according to the second command (holding number designation command) While being executed , When the game ball wins (the second acquisition condition is satisfied) in the normal game state (first game state) in the normal game state (first game state), the first effect display (for example, Execution of pre-reading effects such as icon change effects) is restricted, but the second effect display (holding number display in the holding icon display area and holding number display area) according to the second command (holding number designation command) is executed It is designed to be Therefore, it is possible to make the effects different between when the first acquisition condition is satisfied and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), when executing the variable production that variably displays the production design 70a and the first special design TZ1 corresponding to the first special design, the normal design is displayed. Correspondingly, it is possible to execute a variable effect for variably displaying the third special symbol TZ3. Therefore, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), the image display device allows the player to recognize each of the plurality of symbol variations, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), the number of types (9 types of 1 to 9) of the third special pattern TZ3 that is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the normal pattern is higher than the first special pattern. Correspondingly, the number of types of effect symbols 70a that are variably displayed (1 to 9 + pseudo-continuous symbols that are temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, to suggest the type of jackpot game when a jackpot is achieved (temporary ) 11 types of jackpot suggesting symbols to be stopped) are more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), the production pattern 70a is hidden during a specific production such as a development production, a final production, and a big hit production, while various special patterns (first special pattern TZ1 , 2nd special symbol TZ2, and 3rd special symbol TZ3) are always displayed without being hidden during specific effects such as a development effect, a determined effect, and a jackpot effect. Therefore, even if the effect symbol 70a is not displayed, it is possible to grasp the progress of the game (existence of variable display, etc.) by the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), the performance symbols 70a that are variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbols are displayed with the numbers (jackpot numbers) suggesting a favorable result for the player. It is possible to display the first special symbol TZ1, which is variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol, with a result (jackpot outcome) suggesting an advantageous result for the player when the first special symbol is displayed. . Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the result is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a or the first special symbol TZ1 is seen, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), in the variable production that variably displays the production symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 corresponding to the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol, a specific light emitting unit ( While the first movable member 73a) can execute a specific notification effect (determined success effect) in which it emits light in a specific luminescent color (rainbow color), the third special symbol TZ3 is varied in response to the normal symbol hit variation display. In the variable effect to be displayed, a specific notification effect (determined success effect) in which a specific light emitting portion (first movable member 73a) emits light in a specific emission color (rainbow color) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), in the variable production that variably displays the production design 70a and the first special design TZ1 corresponding to the big hit fluctuation display of the first special design, a specific movable member ( While the first movable member 73a) can execute a specific notification effect (determined success effect) that operates in a specific operation mode, a variable effect that variably displays the third special symbol TZ3 corresponding to the hit variable display of the normal symbol. Then, a specific notification effect (determined success effect) in which a specific movable member (first movable member 73a) operates in a specific operation mode is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), in the variable production that variably displays the production design 70a and the first special design TZ1 corresponding to the big hit fluctuation display of the first special design, a specific production sound ( While it is possible to execute a specific notification effect (determined success effect) in which a ``kyun kyuin'' that suggests that the result is advantageous to the player is output, the third special pattern corresponds to the hit fluctuation display of the normal pattern. In the variable performance that variably displays TZ3, a specific notification performance (determined success performance) in which a specific performance sound (“Kyuin kyuin” that suggests that the result is advantageous to the player) is output is not executed. there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), in the variable production that variably displays the production pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 corresponding to the big hit fluctuation display of the first special pattern, the image display device is specified. While it is possible to execute a specific notification effect (determined success effect) in which the effect image (effect image SED suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player) is displayed, the second corresponding to the hit fluctuation display of the normal symbol 3. In the variable performance that variably displays the special symbol TZ3, a specific notification performance (determined success performance) in which a specific performance image (effect image SED suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player) is displayed is not executed. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), when a variable production is performed to variably display the second special symbol TZ2 corresponding to the big hit fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the result of the variable production is displayed. While the suggesting special performance (BONUS approaching display) is executed, the variation performance of variably displaying the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 corresponding to the big hit variation display of the first special symbol, and the hit variation of the normal symbol In the case where the variation effect of variably displaying the third special symbol TZ3 corresponding to the display is performed, the special effect suggesting the result of the variation effect (BONUS approaching display) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the case where the second special symbols are displayed in a normal game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Production example when the look-ahead production ends halfway during the normal game state)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an effect example when the look-ahead effect ends halfway during the normal game state. Here, it is assumed that the icon change effect and the prefetch zone effect are executed as a result of the prefetch determination based on the winning of the first starting port 45 .

As shown in FIG. 70(a), when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is started, and the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C. It is displayed as an icon TI.

At this time, the icon change effect is started, and the pending icon shift-displayed on the first display portion 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Further, the look-ahead zone effect is started, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and a blue zone image ZG is displayed.

Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 and the second reservation memory increases from "0" to "1", the number of the second reservation number display area 70F increases from "0" to "1". After that, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("531"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI that has been displayed is erased.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol, which is a loss, is started, as shown in FIG. Along with returning to the middle background image, the icon change effect is ended halfway and the blue icon returns to the normal icon. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol TZ2 is started, and the second reserved number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0". In addition, since the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is started in the normal game state, the icon is not displayed.

Next, when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol TZ2 are stopped and displayed with a losing roll ("632"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI that has been displayed is erased.

Then, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, as shown in FIG. 70(e), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is started, the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C is displayed as the icon TI.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 70(f), the left and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in a state where the ready-to-win effect is formed, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. At this time, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is variably displayed), a variable performance (game performance) in which the second special symbol TZ2 is variably displayed without being accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started.

Further, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. The icon display area 70C is hidden (erased). Further, when the change time of the second special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed with the losing roll ("462").

Then, when it comes to the final phase of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (execution timing of the effect of deciding whether to lose or not), the decision success effect is started, and the effect of the ally character C2 launching a final attack on the enemy character C3 is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and an effect image SED indicating that the result is advantageous to the player is displayed, and the voice output device is displayed. 9 outputs a notification sound of "kyuin kyuin" (here, it is notified that a big win will be made).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the determined success production ends, as shown in FIG. Then, the look-ahead zone effect is resumed, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed again.

After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. The winning number ("555") not including the "V" indicating is stopped and displayed. Further, when the look-ahead zone effect ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change effect ends.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, it is determined that the final phase of the SPSP ready-to-win performance (execution timing of the performance for determining whether or not it is a failure) is reached, and the failure performance is started and the friend character C2 becomes the enemy character. A production that loses to C3 is performed. After that, when a character screen of "defeat" is displayed to inform that the player has failed and the failure performance is completed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed with a reach-losing result (for example, "565"). become.

In this way, during the execution of the look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) that expects the execution of the jackpot game over one or a plurality of variable effects started based on the winning of the first start port 45 in the normal game state. When the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the look-ahead effect is terminated halfway. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is unclear which variable display is targeted by the look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), when executing the variable production to variably display the production design 70a and the first special design TZ1 corresponding to the first special design, the second special It is possible to execute a variable effect for variably displaying the second special symbol TZ2 corresponding to the symbol. Therefore, in the normal game state (production modes A to D), the image display device allows the player to recognize each of the plurality of symbols variably displayed, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Also, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), the number of types of the second special symbol TZ2 that is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the second special symbol (9 types of 1 to 9) is higher than the first special The number of types of performance symbols 70a variably displayed corresponding to the symbols (1 to 9 + pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stopped when pseudo-continuous performance is executed, to suggest the type of jackpot game when a jackpot is achieved) (Provisionally) 11 types of jackpot suggesting symbols to be stopped) are increasing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state (production modes A to D), and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal production modes A to D), the production pattern 70a is hidden during a specific production such as a development production, a final production, and a big hit production, while various special patterns (first special pattern TZ1 , 2nd special symbol TZ2, and 3rd special symbol TZ3) are always displayed without being hidden during specific effects such as a development effect, a determined effect, and a jackpot effect. Therefore, even if the effect symbol 70a is not displayed, it is possible to grasp the progress of the game (existence of variable display, etc.) by the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the look-ahead performance started based on the winning of the first start port 45, instead of ending the look-ahead performance halfway, the winning of the second start port 47 is performed. When is generated, the look-ahead effect may be terminated in the middle, or the first special after the variation time of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed at the time when the winning to the second start port 47 occurs The look-ahead effect may be terminated halfway when the symbol is stopped and displayed, or the look-ahead effect may be terminated when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed.

(Production example when the variable production is executed after shifting to the first time-saving gaming state)
Using FIGS. 71 and 72, a description will be given of an effect example in the case where the variable effect is executed after shifting to the first time-saving game state.

When the ending of the second jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), a time-saving rush effect is executed to suggest that the time-saving game state will be entered, and a caution for calling the player's attention is executed. Arousal notification is executed. Specifically, a forget-to-remove caution image TG for calling attention to forgetting to remove a card (storage medium) capable of specifying the balance of valuable value from a rental device that performs game ball rental communication with the gaming machine 1 is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed, and the variable performance of the third special symbol TZ3 being variably displayed without being accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbols 70a is being performed.

After that, when the display period of the forgot-to-take warning image TG has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71(b), an addiction warning image NG for calling attention to excessive addiction to the game is displayed. Then, when the ending time of the second jackpot game has passed, as shown in FIG. 71(c), 50 times are set as the remaining number of time reduction normal figures (G), and the first reservation memory (U1) is "1". The first time-saving game state is started in the state where the second reservation memory (U2) is "0", and the production pattern 70a, which is the winning number stopped and displayed before the immediately preceding jackpot game, is in the time-saving (mode A) background. On the right side of the game area 5a, a first right-handed shot image MG1 prompting the user to shoot the game ball, and a remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times of the time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G) are displayed as "50 remaining". be. In addition, during the time-saving game state, the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) and the remaining number of time-saving small hits (Z) are not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71(d), when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol TZ1 is started without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, The number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0". However, the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C because of the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol, and the remaining number of times image KG indicating the remaining number of times of the time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G) maintains the state of "remaining 50 times".

At this time, when four game balls enter the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern reservation memory (F) increases from "0" to "4", the number of the general pattern reservation number display area 70G changes from "0". The number is increased to "4", and four white icons (suspended icon HI) are additionally displayed in the normal diagram suspended icon display area 70D. Further, when the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and the normal symbols are stop-displayed as the losing normal symbols, the third special symbol TZ3 is stop-displayed as the losing number ("265").

Then, when the normal symbol losing variable display is started, as shown in FIG. Decreased from "4" to "3", the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal figure reserved icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. . Also, the remaining number image KG changes from "50 remaining times" to "49 remaining times". Further, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, the first special symbol TZ1 is stop-displayed with a losing roll ("513").

After that, when one game ball wins the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern reservation memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number of the general pattern reservation number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ”, and one white icon (suspended icon) is additionally displayed in the normal diagram suspended icon display area 70D.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. do. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Next, when the normal symbol loss variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 71(g), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is started, and the number of the normal symbol pending number display area 70G is reduced from "4" to "3", the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal figure reserved icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. be. Also, the remaining number image KG changes from "49 remaining times" to "48 remaining times".

Then, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. do. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Furthermore, when one game ball wins the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern reservation memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number of the general pattern reservation number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ”, and one white icon (suspended icon) to be the target of the look-ahead effect is additionally displayed in the normal pattern suspended icon display area 70D. At this time, a win-time lighting effect is performed, the top lamp 10b emits white light, and an advance notice sound effect "joy" is output.

Next, when the normal symbol losing variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 71(i), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is started, and the number of the normal symbol pending number display area 70G is reduced from "4" to "3", the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal figure reserved icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. be. Also, the remaining number image KG changes from "48 remaining times" to "47 remaining times".

Then, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. do. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the normal symbol loss variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 72(k), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is started, and the number of the normal symbol pending number display area 70G Decreased from "3" to "2", the three pending icons HI displayed in the normal figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI, The pending icon change effect is executed, and the white icon targeted for the look-ahead effect changes to a blue icon. Also, the remaining number image KG changes from "47 remaining times" to "46 remaining times".

Next, when the change time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. indicate. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Furthermore, when one game ball wins the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern reservation memory (F) increases from "2" to "3", the number of the general pattern reservation number display area 70G changes from "2" to "3". ”, and one white icon (suspended icon) is additionally displayed in the normal diagram suspended icon display area 70D.

Then, when the normal symbol loss variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 72(m), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is started, and the number of the normal symbol pending number display area 70G Decreased from "3" to "2", the three pending icons HI displayed in the normal figure pending icon display area 70D are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. . Also, the remaining number image KG changes from "46 remaining times" to "45 remaining times".

After that, when the change time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. do. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Furthermore, when two game balls win the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern reservation memory (F) increases from "2" to "4", the number of the general pattern reservation number display area 70G changes from "2" to "4". ”, and three white icons (suspended icons) are additionally displayed in the normal diagram suspended icon display area 70D.

Next, when the normal symbol hit variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 72(o), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is started, and the number of the normal symbol pending number display area 70G is reduced from "4" to "3", the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal figure reserved icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. , the icon change effect is executed, and the blue icon targeted for the look-ahead effect changes to a red icon. Also, the remaining number image KG changes from "45 remaining times" to "44 remaining times".

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(p), a chance effect is started in which the effect symbol 70a is hidden. Specifically, a text image of "Attack Chance" is displayed to suggest (notify) that there is a possibility that the result will be advantageous to the player. After that, when it comes time to execute the determined effect in the chance effect, an effective suggestion effect suggesting that the validity period may occur is performed.

After that, when the effective suggesting effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 72(q), the effective period of the determined effect occurs and the promoting effect to prompt the operation of the effect button 17 is executed. Specifically, a button image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed. In addition, a character image of "Press the button!" is displayed and a voice of "Press the button" is output.

Next, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. An effect image SED suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player is displayed, and an announcement sound of "kyun kyuin" is output from the audio output device 9 (here, the result is advantageous to the player (second start It is notified that an auxiliary game that opens the mouth 47 in a long opening pattern will be executed).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the determined success performance ends, as shown in FIG. The game is temporarily stopped at a winning number ("555") suggesting that the game is to be played, and the icon display area 70C and the normal pattern pending icon display area 70D are displayed again. Further, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols has passed and the winning normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. Stop display. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the time-saving game state is generated, the time-saving entry performance is executed during the ending of the jackpot game, and the right hitting notification is performed before the time-saving game state occurs (during the jackpot game). . Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the time-saving game state will occur, and to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage due to hitting left when the time-saving game state occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when generating a time-saving gaming state, after performing an attention-raising effect (displaying a forgetting to remove caution image TG, displaying a immersive caution image NG) that calls attention to the player, an effect (background Image change, display of remaining count image KG, notification of hitting to the right, variable production corresponding to time saving state, output of BGM corresponding to production mode, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to effectively call the player's attention.

In addition, during the time-saving game state, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols, but when the time-saving game state is started. When the variable display of the normal symbols is in progress, the number of remaining time-saving normal patterns (G) is not decremented, so the variable performance is executed in which the third special symbol TZ3 is variably displayed without the variable display of the performance symbols 70a. It has become so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the variable display of the first normal symbol for subtracting the number of remaining time-saving normal patterns (G) after the start of the time-saving game state is executed, the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are variable-displayed. It is possible to execute a variable production that is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, a suspension icon (suspension information) corresponding to the normal diagram suspension storage (F) is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the number of normal pattern reserved memories related to the variable display of the normal patterns, which is one of the conditions for ending the time-saving game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, the icon (execution information) corresponding to the normal pattern determination information in which the variable display of normal symbols is started is displayed (changes the pending icon to the icon). Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a pre-reading effect that suggests in advance the result of the variable display of the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern reservation memory (F), by changing the display mode of the normal pattern reservation icon, it is possible to obtain an advantageous result for the player. It is possible to execute the suggested icon change effect. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to expect that the variable display of the normal symbols will bring an advantageous result, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving production modes A to C), when executing the variable production that variably displays the production design 70a and the special design TZ3 corresponding to the normal design, it corresponds to the first special design. It is possible to execute a variable effect to variably display the first special symbol TZ1. Therefore, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the image display device can make the player recognize each of the variable display of a plurality of symbols, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving production mode A to C), the number of types of the first special symbol TZ1 that is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first special symbol (9 types of 1 to 9) is more than the normal symbol. Correspondingly, the number of kinds of effect symbols 70a that are variably displayed (10 kinds of winning suggestive symbols that are (temporarily) stopped to suggest the kind of winning when winning is 1 to 9) is greater. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving production modes A to C), the production pattern 70a is hidden during specific production such as development production, decision production, and jackpot production, while various special patterns (first special pattern TZ1 , 2nd special symbol TZ2, and 3rd special symbol TZ3) are always displayed without being hidden during specific effects such as a development effect, a determined effect, and a jackpot effect. Therefore, even if the effect symbol 70a is not displayed, it is possible to grasp the progress of the game (existence of variable display, etc.) by the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the performance symbols 70a that are variably displayed corresponding to the normal symbols are displayed with the numbers (hit numbers) that suggest advantageous results for the player. The third special symbol TZ3, which is variably displayed corresponding to the normal symbol, can be displayed as a result (jackpot outcome) suggesting an advantageous result for the player. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the result is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a or the first special symbol TZ1 is seen, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving production mode A to C), in the variable production that variably displays the production design 70a and the third special design TZ3 corresponding to the hit variation display of the normal design, a specific light emitting unit (first While the movable member 73a) can execute a specific notification effect (determined success effect) in which it emits light in a specific luminescent color (rainbow color), the first special symbol TZ1 is changed in response to the big hit variation display of the first special symbol. In the variable effect to be displayed, a specific notification effect (determined success effect) in which a specific light emitting portion (first movable member 73a) emits light in a specific emission color (rainbow color) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state in which variable display of normal symbols is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving production mode A to C), in the variable production that variably displays the production design 70a and the third special design TZ3 corresponding to the normal design hit fluctuation display, a specific movable member (first While the movable member 73a) can execute a specific notification effect (determined success effect) that operates in a specific operation mode, a variable effect that variably displays the first special symbol TZ1 corresponding to the big hit variable display of the first special symbol. Then, a specific notification effect (determined success effect) in which a specific movable member (first movable member 73a) operates in a specific operation mode is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state in which variable display of normal symbols is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving production modes A to C), in the variable production that variably displays the production design 70a and the third special design TZ3 corresponding to the hit fluctuation display of the normal design, a specific production sound (player While it is possible to execute a specific notification effect (determined success effect) in which a ``kyuin kyuin'' that suggests that the result is advantageous to the player is output, the first special symbol corresponds to the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol. In the variable performance that variably displays TZ1, a specific notification performance (determined success performance) in which a specific performance sound (“Kyuin kyuin” that suggests that the result is advantageous to the player) is output is not executed. there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state in which variable display of normal symbols is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving production modes A to C), in the variable production that variably displays the production pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 corresponding to the normal pattern jackpot fluctuation display, the image display device has a specific production. While it is possible to execute a specific notification effect (determined success effect) in which an image (an effect image SED suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player) is displayed, a second special symbol corresponding to the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol can be executed. 1. In the variable performance that variably displays 1 special symbol TZ1, a specific notification performance (determined success performance) in which a specific performance image (effect image SED suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player) is displayed is not executed. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the variable display of normal symbols is important, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving production mode A to C), the production pattern 70a that is variably displayed corresponding to the normal pattern corresponds to the first special design in the normal game state (normal production mode A to C). is displayed at the same position as the performance pattern 70a which is variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to variably display the performance symbols without a sense of incongruity between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when it is in a customer waiting state at the start of the time-saving game state after shifting from the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the production mode of the time-saving game state may be muted without audibly outputting. . In this case, when a game ball enters the normal game gate 44 from the customer waiting state and the normal game reservation memory is generated and the variable performance is started, the BGM corresponding to the performance mode of the time-saving game state is audible. output.

In addition, although the attention calling effect is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, the attention calling effect may be performed from the ending of the jackpot game to the time saving game state, or immediately after the start of the time saving game state ( During the first variable effect), the attention calling effect may be performed, or in the attention calling effect, the display of the forgetting to take caution image TG and the display of the obsessive attention image NG may be displayed in order (which may appear first).

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the time-saving game state, the variable performance of varying and displaying the first special symbol TZ1 is executed without the variable display of the performance symbol 70a. there is Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol in a time-saving game state in which the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is important, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It is possible to

In addition, when the plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the normal pattern fluctuation performance during the time saving game state, it is possible to cause the background image to perform the performance operation, and the plurality of performance symbols in which the background image is performing the performance operation. A plurality of commands (normal symbols The pattern confirmation command, the command at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern hold number designation command, normal pattern designation command, normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command, etc.) Normal pattern retention memory (F) is a predetermined number (for example, one) When receiving a command at the start of fluctuation display of normal patterns (normal pattern retention number designation command, normal design designation command, general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) , Start the normal pattern fluctuation production (variation production with variable display of the production pattern 70a and the third special pattern), and display a number of normal pattern pending icons that are one less than a specific number (for example, three) and then display a predetermined A number (for example, one) of the general map pending icon may be displayed.

(Production example 1 after the player is notified of a result that is advantageous to the player in the regular pattern fluctuation production during the time saving game state)
With reference to FIG. 73, a description will be given of production example 1 (when the stock chance production is not executed) after a result advantageous to the player has been notified in the regular pattern fluctuation production during the time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), after the execution of the determined success effect in the normal pattern fluctuation effect, when the change time of the normal pattern passes and the winning normal pattern is stopped and displayed, the effect pattern 70a and the third special The symbol TZ3 is temporarily stopped at a win ("555"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 opens in a long opening pattern is started, as shown in FIG. A right-handed image MG3 is displayed, and limit notification corresponding to the remaining period of the auxiliary game (remaining time during which the game ball can enter the second starting port 47) is started. Specifically, the count image CG is displayed in the upper left part of the first image display device 70, and the display size is enlarged while counting down according to the passage of time.

Then, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. increases from 0' to '1'. In addition, a special prize winning sound (“vacuum”), which is one type of anticipation effect, is output, and an advantageous state acquisition effect indicating that the player will be in an advantageous state is executed. Specifically, a character image of "BONUS" is displayed to indicate that the player will be in an advantageous state without using the character image of the small win or the big win.

In addition, when the result of the pre-reading determination of the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins the second start port 47 is a big win or a small win, the same special winning sound is output and it is a loss. In this case, the special winning sound is not output, but the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins in the second start port 47 is determined as a big hit or a small win without being determined as a loss. In this case, the special winning sound may be output without fail when the game ball enters the second starting port 47.例文帳に追加

Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a small hit (ultra-shortened variation) is started before the auxiliary game ends, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the second special symbol TZ2 is started without the variable display of the symbol 70a. Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol TZ2 is stopped and displayed with a small winning eye ("5V5") as shown in FIG. 73(e). do.

After that, when the opening of the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. 73 (f), the opening effect is started, and the second right hitting information prompting to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a (Display of second right-hand shot image MG2, output of "right-hand shot" sound) is executed. Then, when the round game of the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. The display is updated.

Here, when the game ball that wins in the first big winning hole 50 during the small winning game passes through the specific area 53, the small winning game becomes the first round, and the small winning game becomes the first round. When the winning game ends, the second round is started and the round presentation is continued. In addition, when shifting from the small winning game to the big winning game, the ending effect of the small winning game is not executed.

On the other hand, while the game ball does not enter the first large winning hole 50 during the small winning game, or the game ball that enters the first large winning hole does not pass through the specific area 53, the first large winning hole 50 is closed. When it is closed, as shown in FIG. 73(h), in the ending period of the small winning game, a disappointing notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53. Specifically, an effect of closing the door image is performed, and it is notified that the small winning game has ended and the big winning game has not started.

Then, when the ending of the small winning game is completed, the door image SY is erased as shown in FIG. A) The background image is displayed.

In this way, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, that is, before the start of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the special symbol determination information acquired at this time Special which is one kind of look-ahead effect A winning sound (“vacuum”) is output, and an advantageous state acquisition effect (BONUS display) indicating that the player is in an advantageous state is executed. Therefore, it is possible to impress the player that it is advantageous for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if any of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied during the time saving game state (second game state), the time saving game state can be ended, and the third end condition among the plurality of end conditions is satisfied (time saving small win remaining When the time-saving game state ends after the number of times is 0), execution of a specific display (result display) showing the game results during the series of advantageous periods is restricted. Therefore, to provide a player with a fair game by suppressing a game method such as aiming at a big win game or a small win game likely to be advantageous without passing a game ball through a specific area 53 in a small win game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the second reserve memory (U2) than when the look-ahead effect (icon change effect, winning light emission effect) related to the normal figure reserve memory (F) is executed during the time saving game state (second game state) It is expected that the result will be more advantageous to the player if the anticipatory effect (output of special prize winning sound (“vacuum”), advantageous state acquisition effect indicating that the player will be in an advantageous state, etc.) is executed. degree is high. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation when the look-ahead effect related to the second reserved memory (U2) is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in a specific variation pattern (ultra-shortened variation) during the time saving game state (second game state), the second special symbol is displayed without the variation display of the production symbol 70a. A variable performance (game performance) with variable display of the special symbol TZ2 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and to give an impression as if a small winning game or a big winning game is started immediately after the auxiliary game is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Production example 2 after an advantageous result for the player is notified in the regular pattern fluctuation production during the time saving game state)
With reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the effect example 2 (when the stock chance effect is not executed) after a result advantageous to the player is notified in the regular pattern variation effect during the time saving game state will be described.

First, after the success effect is executed in the normal pattern variation effect, when the normal pattern variation time elapses and the winning normal pattern is stopped and displayed, the effect pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are hit (" 555"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 opens in a long opening pattern is started, as shown in FIG. A right-handed image MG3 is displayed, and limit notification corresponding to the remaining period of the auxiliary game (remaining time during which the game ball can enter the second starting port 47) is started. Specifically, the count image CG is displayed in the upper left part of the first image display device 70, and the display size is enlarged while counting down according to the passage of time.

Then, when the game ball wins the second start port 47, as shown in FIG. increases from 0' to '1'. In addition, a special prize winning sound (“vacuum”), which is one type of anticipation effect, is output, and an advantageous state acquisition effect indicating that the player will be in an advantageous state is executed. Specifically, a character image of "BONUS" is displayed to indicate that the player will be in an advantageous state without using the character image of the small win or the big win.

Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol (here, short stock chance variation) that becomes a small hit is started before the auxiliary game ends, as shown in FIG. 74(c), an advantageous state acquisition effect The stock chance variation performance is started in which the second special symbol TZ2 is variably displayed without the variability display of the performance symbol 70a. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(d), the fact that a state advantageous to the player (small win or big win) is stocked, and the second reserve memory (U2) that can acquire a state that is almost advantageous to the player are stocked. A text image of "BONUS Stock + Entering Stock Chance" is displayed to indicate that the player is entering a stock chance with a possibility of doing so.

After that, when the stock chance effect is started with the start of the ending of the auxiliary game, as shown in FIG. A notification image is displayed and a stock chance background image is displayed. In addition, an effect pattern 70a smaller than the normal size is displayed, and a normal pattern reserved icon display region 70D in which the number of reserved icons corresponding to the icon display region 70C and the normal pattern reserved storage (F) is displayed is displayed. be.

Then, when the ending period of the auxiliary game ends and the normal symbol loss variation display is started, as shown in FIG. The number in the figure pending number display area 70G is reduced from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the normal figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. One is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the remaining number of times image KG indicating the remaining number of time-saving normal patterns is not displayed because the stock chance is being produced.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. The icon TI displayed in the icon display area is erased. In addition, when one game ball wins the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern reservation memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number of the general pattern reservation number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ”, and one white icon (suspended icon) is additionally displayed in the normal diagram suspended icon display area 70D.

In addition, when the normal symbol loss variation display is started, as shown in FIG. Decreased from "4" to "3", the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal figure reserved icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. .

Next, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. The icon TI displayed in the icon display area is erased. In addition, when one game ball wins the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern reservation memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number of the general pattern reservation number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ”, and one white icon (suspended icon) is additionally displayed in the normal diagram suspended icon display area 70D.

Then, when the normal symbol hit variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 74 (j), the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is started, and the number of the normal symbol pending number display area 70G Decreased from "4" to "3", the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal figure reserved icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. .

Next, when the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and the winning normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. The icon TI displayed in the icon display area is erased. In addition, an auxiliary game is started in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern.

After that, after the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern is started, one game ball wins the second starting port 47 and the second reservation memory is increased from "0" to "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 75(l), the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "0" to "1", indicating that the player has stocked a state (small win or big win) that is advantageous to the player. The stock increase effect shown is executed. Specifically, a character image of "stock+1" is displayed, and the stock notification image is updated to "V×2".

Then, when the auxiliary game ends and the normal symbol loss variation display is started, as shown in FIG. The number in the display area 70G is reduced from "4" to "3", and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal figure reserved icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C and one is displayed. It is displayed as an icon TI.

In addition, when the change time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. Then, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area is erased. In addition, when one game ball wins the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern reservation memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number of the general pattern reservation number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ”, and one white icon (suspended icon) is additionally displayed in the normal diagram suspended icon display area 70D.

After that, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 75(o), the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is started, and the number of the normal symbol pending number display area 70G is changed to " 4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the normal figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C and one is displayed as the icon TI.

Next, at a predetermined time before the end of the stock chance effect, as shown in FIG. 75(p), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is terminated in the middle to start the end suggesting effect suggesting the end of the stock chance. , a character image reading "Stock Chance Ended" is displayed. Then, when the variation time of the normal symbols has passed during the end suggesting effect, the third special symbol TZ3 is stop-displayed with a losing roll ("142") as shown in FIG. 75(q).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol passes and the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol TZ2 is stopped and displayed with the small winning eye ("3V3") as shown in FIG. 75(r). Then, a stock release performance is executed to suggest that a state advantageous to the player who is stocked (here, a small win game) is released, and a character image of "BONUS release" is displayed.

Then, when the opening of the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. 75 (s), the opening effect is started, and the second right-handed information prompting to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a (Display of second right-hand shot image MG2, output of "right-hand shot" sound) is executed. Then, when the round game of the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. The display is updated.

Thus, at least one of the execution period of the second special symbol variation display (first variation display) and the execution period of the normal symbol variation display (second variation display) during the time saving game state (second game state) When the part overlaps, the game production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (stock chance production) and the game production corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (variation production of the production pattern) can be executed (executed in parallel) possible). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, during the game production (stock chance production) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the game production (acquisition failure production, acquisition success production) corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol is performed multiple times. It is executable. Therefore, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that there are a plurality of chances to obtain an advantageous result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if any of a plurality of end conditions is satisfied during the time-saving game state (second game state), the time-saving game state can be ended, and the first end condition for ending the time-saving game state is established (time-saving normal figure remaining number of times = 0) and when the time-saving game state ends, the variation effect (game effect) for variably displaying the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol is not terminated in the middle. , When the second end condition for terminating the time-saving gaming state is established (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0) and the time-saving gaming state ends, the production design 70a and the third special design TZ corresponding to the fluctuation display of the normal design It is possible to end the variable effect (game effect) that variably displays (the effect symbol 70a is hidden). Therefore, when the second end condition is satisfied (remaining number of time saving special symbols=0), the time saving game state can be terminated in a novel manner, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the time saving game state (second game state), after starting the variable production (game production) that variably displays the production pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern, the time saving game state is ended. When the first end condition is established (remaining number of time-saving normal patterns = 0), a variable effect (game effect) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 is performed for the first period (variation time of the normal pattern has elapsed) On the other hand, in the time saving game state (second game state), after starting the variable production (game production) that variably displays the production pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern, the time saving game When the second end condition for terminating the state is established (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), the variable performance (game performance) for variably displaying the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is changed to the second period (variation of the special symbol It is possible to end it with the passage of time). Therefore, the performance at the end of the time-saving game state can be made different between when the first end condition is satisfied and when the second end condition is satisfied, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance mode A to C), the production pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the hit variation display of the normal symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol. When the effect is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3, which are variably displayed corresponding to the hit variation display of the normal symbol, suggest an advantageous result for the player. It is possible to inform the player that the result is advantageous to the player by becoming an eye. Therefore, even during the variable display of the second special symbols, the player can easily recognize that the variable display of the normal symbols is an advantageous result for the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. becomes.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance mode A to C), the production pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the hit variation display of the normal symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol. When the effect is executed, after the effect symbol 70a becomes a result that suggests a result advantageous to the player (while the BONUS is being displayed), the third special symbol TZ3 is not displayed, but the result is advantageous to the player. It is designed to continuously display a roll that suggests. Therefore, the non-display of the production pattern 70a makes it possible to ensure a wide display area for the production, and the third special pattern TZ3 allows the player to confirm that the result is advantageous, thereby allowing the game to be played. It is possible to improve the interest of

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance mode A to C), the production pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the hit variation display of the normal symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol. When the effect is executed, it is possible to execute a special effect (stock chance effect) suggesting that a state advantageous to the player is waiting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the stock chance effect is composed of, for example, two types of effect modes (first stock mode, second stock mode), and in the first stock mode, a specific effect (stock increase effect In the second stock mode, a specific effect (effect of notifying the stock number such as stock increase effect) is executed during the stop display of the second special symbol. may

In addition, before the start of the stock chance effect, a normal pattern winning variation display (a variation display in which an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern is executed) is started, and this winning variation display is started. If the game ends during the stock chance effect, a specific effect (effect of notifying the number of stocks such as a stock increase effect) corresponding to the winning variation display may be executed during the stock chance effect.

In addition, when the normal pattern winning variation display (the variation display in which the auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is opened in the long opening pattern is executed) is started during the execution of the stock chance production, this A specific effect corresponding to the winning variation display (an effect of notifying the number of stocks such as a stock increase effect) is not executed, but during the execution of the stock chance effect, the winning variation display of the normal symbol (the second start port 47 is a long open pattern) When the variable display that the released auxiliary game is executed) is started and this winning variable display ends after the end of the stock chance effect, a specific effect corresponding to this winning variable display (stock such as stock increase effect etc. Effect of notifying the number) may be executed.

Further, although the effect of suggesting the remaining time of the stock chance effect is not performed, the countdown effect (remaining time notification effect) of suggesting the remaining time of the stock chance effect may be executed.

(Example of effect where result display is performed when the time saving game state ends)
With reference to FIG. 76, an effect example in which a result display (a display showing the result of a game during a series of advantageous periods) is performed when the time-saving gaming state ends will be described.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), when the time-saving normal pattern remaining number of times remains two times and the fluctuation time of the losing normal pattern has elapsed and the losing normal pattern is stopped and displayed, the effect pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3. is temporarily stopped with a losing roll ("561"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the remaining number of times image KG is "remaining 2 times".

Then, when the normal symbol remaining number of remaining times is 1 and the normal symbol losing variation display is started, as shown in FIG. , The number of the normal pattern pending number display area 70G is reduced from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the normal pattern pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. Then, one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "two times remaining" to "one time remaining".

After that, when one game ball wins the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern reservation memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number of the general pattern reservation number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ”, and one white icon (suspended icon) is additionally displayed in the normal diagram suspended icon display area 70D.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. indicate. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In addition, when the time-saving normal pattern remaining number of remaining times is 0 and the normal symbol losing variation display is started, the time-saving game state ends, and as shown in FIG. The variable display of TZ3 is started, the number of the normal pattern pending number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the normal pattern pending icon display area 70D are displayed Shift display is performed toward the area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "one remaining" to "0 remaining".

Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 76(e), a shutter image that suggests the end of the time saving game state closes is displayed, and during time saving (mode A) background The image, the effect pattern 70a, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the normal pattern pending icon HI displayed in the normal pattern pending icon display region 70D gradually disappear.

Further, when the shutter image is completely closed, as shown in FIG. 76(f), a result display showing the results of games during a series of advantageous periods is displayed. Specifically, a character image of "1 win" indicating the number of jackpot games and "750pt" indicating the number of awarded balls are displayed. Further, when the fluctuation time elapses, the third special symbol TZ3 is stop-displayed with a losing dot ("537") while the effect symbol 70a is not displayed.

Next, when the normal symbol losing variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 76(g), the variable display of the third special symbol TZ3 is started without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and the normal symbol is reserved. The number in the number display area 70G is decreased from "3" to "2". However, at this time, since the first reservation memory (U1) does not exist and the customer is waiting, the result display continues. Then, when the change time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("748") as shown in FIG. 76(h).

After that, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. A white pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 70B, and the normal (mode A) background image is displayed. Then, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 76(j), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is started, and the first reserved number display The number in the area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI Is displayed.

In this way, if any of the plurality of end conditions is established during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), the time-saving gaming state can be ended, and the first end condition among the plurality of end conditions is established (time-saving normal When the time-saving game state ends with the remaining number of times shown in the figure=0), it is possible to execute a specific display (result display) showing the results of the game during a series of advantageous periods. Therefore, when the time-saving gaming state ends, it is possible to confirm the result of the game during the series of advantageous periods, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, during the specific display (result display) executed when the time saving game state ends, the normal pattern fluctuation display (the effect pattern 70a of the production pattern 70a It is possible to execute a variable performance in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner without being accompanied by a variable display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the fact that the variable display of normal symbols, which is more disadvantageous than the time-saving game state, is being executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, after the specific display (result display) indicating the game result in the series of advantageous periods is executed, even if the normal symbol fluctuation display is newly executed, the specific display (result display) is not finished, and the first display is newly executed. When the variable display of the special symbols is executed, the specific display (result display) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the specific display (result display) ends so quickly that the player cannot check it, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the hit determination based on the general pattern reservation memory (F) stored during the time saving game state (second game state) is executed during the time saving game state, the production pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 While it is possible to execute a variable production (game production) with a variable display, the hit determination based on the normal figure reservation memory (F) stored during the time saving game state (second game state) is after the time saving game state is completed. When executed during the normal game state (first game state), the execution of the variable effect (game effect) accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is restricted (the variable display of the effect symbol 70a A variation effect is executed in which the third special symbol TZ3 is variably displayed without being accompanied. Therefore, it is possible to make the player less conscious of the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal game state after the time-saving game state is finished, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the first end condition of the plurality of end conditions is established (remaining number of time-saving normal figures = 0) and the time-saving game state ends, the time-saving game state does not go through the jackpot game. If it is the third time-saving game state to be shifted, any of the plurality of end conditions (time-saving normal figure remaining number = 0, time-saving special figure remaining number = 0, time-saving small winning number remaining = 0) is established and time-saving Even if the game state ends, the specific display (result display) indicating the game result during the series of advantageous periods may not be executed.

(Example of effect where the result display is not performed when the time saving game state ends)
With reference to FIG. 77, an effect example will be described in which the result display (display showing the result of the game during a series of advantageous periods) is not performed when the time saving game state ends.

When the ending time of the jackpot game elapses, as shown in FIG. 77(a), 50 times are set as the number of remaining hours (G), the first reservation memory (U1) is "1" and the second The first time-saving game state is started in the state where the reservation memory (U2) is "0", and the first right-handed image MG1 prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the background image during time saving (mode A) and the game area 5a. , and the remaining number of times image KG indicating the remaining number of times of the time-saving normal figure remaining number of times (G) is displayed as "remaining 50".

At this time, the first reserved memory (U1) is "1", the second reserved memory (U2) and the normal pattern reserved memory (F) are "0", and the normal symbol loss variation display is executed. However, since it is started during the jackpot game, the third special symbol TZ3 is variably displayed without variably displaying the effect symbol 70a.

Then, when the losing variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the variable performance is started in which the first special symbol TZ1 is variably displayed without the variable display of the performance symbol 70a. , and the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0". Not updated. Further, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols has passed and the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the effect symbol 70a maintains the stop number after the previous variable display, and the third special symbol TZ3 is the losing number ("225"). ) to stop the display.

Further, when the change time of the first special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol TZ1 is stopped and displayed with the losing number ("156") as shown in FIG. 77(c). Also, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first reservation memory (U1) increases from "0" to "1", and the first reservation number display area 70E increases from "0" to "1". do.

After that, the player continues the left-handed shooting aiming at the left side of the game area 5a, and the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 and the variable display of the first special symbol are repeated. Then, when the first special symbol remaining number of times of time saving special figure becomes "0" is started, as shown in FIG. A variable effect in which the symbol TZ1 is variably displayed is executed, and the number in the first reserved number display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1", but the number of remaining time-saving normal figures is the variable display of the first special symbol. The remaining count image KG corresponding to (G) is not updated.

Next, when the change time of the first special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , The time-saving game state ends and it becomes a normal game state. display, etc.) are not executed.

After that, the timing of receiving the first command of the effect control board 130 after shifting to the normal game state, here, when the first variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 77(f), A mode transition image MI that shields the effect symbol 70a is displayed, the first special symbol TZ1 starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the number of the first pending number display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0".

When the display time of the mode transition image MI elapses, the mode transition image MI is erased as shown in FIG. 77(g), and an effect display corresponding to the normal game state is started. Specifically, the normal middle (mode A) background image corresponding to the normal gaming state, the effect symbol 70a that is displayed in a variable display mode corresponding to the normal gaming state, the first pending icon display area 70B, and the first special symbol. The icon display area 70C displaying the icon TI to be displayed is displayed.

In addition, at the timing of the first command reception of the effect control board 130 after shifting to the normal game state, when the customer waiting state designation command is received, this command is used as a trigger to start the effect display corresponding to the normal game state. However, in this case, the effect display corresponding to the normal game state may be started after the mode transition image MI is displayed, or the effect corresponding to the normal game state may be displayed without displaying the mode transition image MI. Display may be started.

In this way, if any of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied during the time-saving game state (second game state), the time-saving game state can be ended, and the first end condition (time-saving normal figure remaining) of the plurality of end conditions number of times=0) and the time-saving gaming state ends, a specific display (result display) suggesting the result of the game during the series of advantageous periods can be executed, while the second end condition among the plurality of end conditions. is established (time saving special figure remaining number = 0) and the time saving game state ends, execution of specific display (result display) showing the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods is restricted. Therefore, when the time-saving gaming state ends, it is possible to confirm the result of the game during the series of advantageous periods, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first start port 45 and the first reservation memory (U1) increases, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 receives a winning command (first reservation number designation command , first special figure prefetch designation command) is transmitted, but when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 during the time saving game state and the first reservation memory (U1) increases, the first reservation number Although the number in the display area 70E is increased and updated, the first pending icon change effect is not executed because the first pending icon is not additionally displayed. Therefore, in the time-saving game state in which it is important to perform the variable display of the normal symbols, the player is notified that the game ball has won the first start port 45 and that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to be conscious of it, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the game ball wins (the first acquisition condition is satisfied) in the first start port 45 during the time saving game state (second game state), the first effect display ( For example, pre-reading effects such as icon change effects) are limited, but the second effect display (holding number display in the holding icon display area and holding number display area) according to the second command (holding number designation command) On the other hand, when the game ball wins (the second acquisition condition is satisfied) in the normal figure gate 44 during the time saving game state (second game state), the first effect according to the first command (prefetching designation command) Display (for example, pre-reading effect such as icon change effect) and second effect display (holding number display in pending icon display area or pending number display area) according to the second command (holding number designation command) is executed It's like Therefore, it is possible to make different presentations when the first acquisition condition is satisfied and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the time-saving game state, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in the second embodiment, on the condition that the first holding memory (U1) exists at the start of the time saving game state, the time saving normal drawing remaining set to 4 times while accumulating the normal drawing holding memory (F) An auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern is executed over a plurality of times of variable display of normal symbols until the number of times (G) becomes "0", so that a small win or a big win is achieved. Since it differs from the first embodiment in that a battle mode effect is executed to prompt whether or not to stock (increase) the 2 reserved memory (U2), only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Special figure variation pattern determination table for time saving in the second embodiment)
FIG. 78(a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for time saving in the second embodiment.

As the effect contents shown in the special figure variation pattern determination table for time saving shown in FIG. 78(a), "battle mode variation" means that the above-described battle mode effect is performed.
"Stock release fluctuation" means that while releasing (decreasing) the second reserved memory (U2) stocked (increased) during the battle mode production, the jackpot game via the jackpot game or the jackpot game not via the jackpot game It means performing a stock release fluctuation effect that informs that is executed.

As for the stock release fluctuation, if the battle mode production is in progress, the stock release fluctuation production is executed. An immediate hit variation effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol TZ2, which are hits without passing through, are stop-displayed.

(Game state setting table in the second embodiment)
FIG. 78(b) is a diagram showing an example of the first game state setting table in the second embodiment, and FIG. 78(c) is a diagram showing an example of the second game state setting table in the modified example.

In the game state setting table shown in FIG. 78(b) and FIG. 78(c), the number of remaining time-saving normal patterns (G) is "5 times" in any case (the normal symbol that is executed first during the time-saving game state). 1 time of variable display + the number corresponding to the total of 4 times stored as normal pattern reservation memory (F) during variable display of this normal pattern), and the normal pattern executed in this "5 times" becomes shorter than the time of the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the time-saving gaming state. In other words, by the time the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the time saving game state ends, the five times of variable display of the normal symbols executed in the time saving game state are completed.

In addition, by setting the upper limit number of the normal figure reservation memory (F) to "3" which is less than the upper limit number of the first reservation memory (U1) and the upper limit number of the second reservation memory (U2), (G) "4 times" (1 time of normal pattern variation display that is first executed during the time saving game state + 3 times that is stored as normal pattern suspension memory (F) during this normal pattern variation display number corresponding to the total).

(Hit determination table for normal symbols in the second embodiment)
FIG. 78(d) is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the second embodiment.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. The probability of being determined to be a hit is higher than in the symbol hit determination table.

(Normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving in the second embodiment)
FIG.78(e) is a figure which shows an example of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving in 2nd Embodiment.

In the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving shown in FIG. 78 (e), during the fluctuation time (60 seconds) in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed in the time saving gaming state, the number of remaining time saving normal figures (G ) becomes “0”, that is, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is set so that the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is executed five times.

As the production contents shown in the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving shown in FIG. An effect suggesting that the result is disadvantageous to the player, that is, the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern is not executed, and the second reserved memory (U2) is not stocked (increased). is executed.
"Battle victory fluctuation" means that the friendly character and the enemy character face each other, and the friendly character finally wins, which is advantageous for the player. This means that the auxiliary game to be released is executed, and an effect suggesting that the second reserved memory (U2) will be stocked (increased) will be executed.

(Example of production where battle mode production is performed)
An example of an effect when the battle mode effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), during the ending of the jackpot game, a time-saving rush effect is executed, and an immersion warning image NG for calling attention to excessive immersion in the game is displayed. At this time, the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed, and the variable performance of the third special symbol TZ3 being variably displayed without being accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbols 70a is being performed.

After that, when the ending time of the jackpot game has passed, as shown in FIG. The time saving game state is started in the state where the second reservation memory (U2) is "0". Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol (battle mode variable effect) is started, the variable display of the first special symbol TZ1 is started without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and the first reserved number display area 70E The number decreases from "1" to "0".

In addition, the battle mode effect is started, and the normal pattern icon display portions FT1 to FT5 for displaying icons corresponding to the five normal pattern fluctuation displays (normal pattern determination information) in the time saving game state are displayed in gray. . In addition, a second right-handed notification (display of a second right-handed image MG2) prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a is performed. The remaining time until the production starts is displayed as "7 seconds".

After that, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern holding memory (F) increases from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. 79(c), the normal pattern icon display section FT1 It is displayed as a white icon, which is a normal icon, with an effect of being displayed in color. Further, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the variable performance of varying and displaying the third special symbol TZ3 is started without the variable display of the performance symbols 70a, and the countdown of the remaining time is started.

Then, when two game balls pass through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern holding memory (F) increases from "0" to "2", as shown in FIG. 79(d), the normal pattern icon display unit The FT2 and the normal icon display portion FT3 are displayed in color and displayed as a white icon, which is a normal icon.

Furthermore, when two game balls pass through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern holding memory (F) increases from "2" to "4", as shown in FIG. FT4 and the normal icon display portion FT5 are displayed in color, and are displayed as white icons, which are normal icons. It should be noted that after the normal pattern retention memory (F) reaches the upper limit number of "4", each time the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 (overflow of the normal pattern retention memory), the icon changes as a look-ahead effect A lottery is carried out, and an icon change effect is executed in which the color of one of the normal pattern icons changes when the winning is won, so that the variable display of the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern reservation memory (F) is advantageous to the player. It is suggested that the possibility of

After that, when the remaining time until the final effect suggesting the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display corresponding to the normal pattern icon displayed in the normal pattern icon display section FT1 becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 79(f), When the remaining time becomes "0 seconds" and the final effect is started, as shown in FIG. 79(g), a character image of "Let's go!" At the same time, the valid period occurs, and the promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is started by changing the normal icon of the normal icon display part FT1 to the button image and the gauge image. At this time, the general-purpose icon display portion FT1 is displayed in gray, and the general-purpose icon is extinguished.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 79(i), the effect of erasing the effect button image is performed, and the failure effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 79(j), a character image of "Unfortunate" is displayed. Then, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols has passed, the losing normal symbols are stop-displayed, and the third special symbol TZ3 is stop-displayed with a losing roll ("417").

Furthermore, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 80(k), the battle variable effect is started in which the third special symbol TZ3 is variably displayed without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(l), a character image "1ST BATTLE" is displayed, and a battle effect is started in which the ally characters and the enemy characters battle.

After that, when it comes to the final stage of the battle production, the final production is started, and as shown in FIG. As a result, the promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the general-purpose icon display portion FT1 is displayed in gray, and the general-purpose icon is extinguished.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 80(n), the effect of erasing the effect button image is performed, and the failure effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(o), a character image of "Unfortunate" is displayed, and when the variation time of the normal symbols has passed, the lost normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the third special symbol TZ3 is lost. The display stops at the eye ("562"). After that, the variation display (battle variation effect) of normal symbols corresponding to the normal icon display portion FT3, the normal icon display portion FT4 and the normal icon display portion FT5 is executed in order.

After that, when the variation display (battle variation effect) of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol display part FT5 is started, the time-saving game state is ended, and the effect button 17 is operated in the final phase decision effect in the battle effect. When the effective period has passed, as shown in FIG. 80(p), an effect of erasing the effect button image is performed, and a failure effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(q), a character image of "Unfortunate" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 80(r), the results for a series of advantageous periods are displayed.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols has passed, as shown in FIG. 80(s), the losing normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed with the losing number ("537"). The result display continues. After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the timing of receiving the first command of the effect control board 130 after shifting to the normal game state, here, the first variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, the mode transition image MI that shields the production pattern 70a is displayed, the first special pattern TZ1 starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the number in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". Decrease display.

On the other hand, when the determined success effect is executed, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 launches a final attack on the enemy character C3. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the presentation position, and the voice output device 9 outputs an announcement sound of "kyuin kyuin" (in this case, a jackpot is given). is notified). After that, the effects change as shown in FIGS. 73(a) to 73(g).

In this way, on the condition that the first reservation memory (U1) exists at the start of the time-saving gaming state, the number of times of time-saving general patterns remaining (G) becomes "0". It is possible to execute the battle mode production that is executed by Therefore, the time-saving game state can be shown as a series of effects, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, at least part of the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display) during the time saving gaming state (second gaming state) and the execution period of the variable display of the normal symbols (second variable display) When overlapping, the game production (battle mode production) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the game production (battle production) corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed (can be executed in parallel). there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, during the game production (battle mode production) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the game production (battle production) corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols can be executed multiple times. there is Therefore, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that there are a plurality of chances to obtain an advantageous result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment)
◆Here, conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information obtained based on the winning of the game medium in the start area, and depending on the result of the determination, A gaming machine that executes a game effect is common. Among such gaming machines, after the end of the special game, there was one that controls to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-057968). However, such a game machine has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) First judgment means for judging the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired based on, and the first reservation storage (first Determination information (general figure determination information, special figure determination information) acquired based on the first storage means stored as storage storage) and establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal figure gate, entry to the second start opening) A second determination means for determining, a second storage means for storing determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition as a second reservation memory (general figure reservation memory, second reservation memory), and a first A game state (normal game state) and a state control means that can be controlled in a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a first game according to the determination result of the first determination means a production control means capable of executing a production (first fluctuation production) and a second game production (normal figure fluctuation production, second fluctuation production) according to the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the production The control means can display a first icon (first pending icon) corresponding to the first pending memory and a second icon (normal figure pending icon, second pending icon) corresponding to the second pending memory. The display of the second icon is restricted during the first game state, but the first icon can be displayed, and the display of the first icon is restricted during the second game state. However, the second icon can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) First determination means for determining the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on, and determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (general figure gate, entry into the second starting port) ( Normal figure determination information, special figure determination information), a first game state (normal game state), and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state. A possible state control means, a first game effect (first variation effect) according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second game effect (normal figure variation effect) according to the determination result of the second determination means , a second variable effect), and the effect control means is provided with a first determination result (second When it is determined that the starting port is opened in a long opening pattern, a big win, a small win), the first result suggesting effect is executed in the second game effect, and the second determining means during the second game state. is a second determination result different from the first determination result (opening in the short opening pattern of the second starting port, etc.), when the second game effect is different from the first result suggesting effect 2 Execute the result suggesting effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) First determination means for determining the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on, and determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (general figure gate, entry into the second starting port) ( Normal figure determination information, special figure determination information), a first game state (normal game state), and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state. A possible state control means, and a variable performance (first variable performance, normal figure variable performance, second variable performance ), and the judgment result of the second judgment means includes a first judgment result (opening in the long opening pattern of the second start port, big win, small win) different from the losing result. And a second determination result different from the first determination result (opening in the short opening pattern of the second start port, special loss that shortens c time), and the effect control means is during the second game state When it is determined that the first determination result is obtained by the second determination means, the plurality of performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode (hitting symbols, odd symbols are aligned) in the variable performance, and the When the second determination result (opening in the short opening pattern of the second start port, special loss that shortens c time) is determined by the second determination means during the second game state, the plurality of The performance symbols are stop-displayed in a second mode of stopping dots (losing dots, even-numbered symbols) different from the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (entering the first start hole). A first determination means for determining the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on, and a first variation display (variation display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determination means. A second judgment that judges determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the variation display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting port) means, a second variable display executing means for executing a second variable display (normal symbol variable display, second special symbol variable display) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a first game effect (first variable effect) corresponding to the first variable display. , and a production control means capable of executing a second game production (normal figure fluctuation production, second fluctuation production) corresponding to the second variation display, and the production control means, during the first game state , execution of the second game effect is restricted, and the second game effect can be executed during the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) A first determination means for determining the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on, and a first variation display (variation display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determination means. A second judgment that judges determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the variation display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting port) means, a second variable display executing means for executing a second variable display (normal symbol variable display, second special symbol variable display) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a first game effect (first variable effect) corresponding to the first variable display. , and a production control means capable of executing a second game production (normal figure fluctuation production, second fluctuation production) corresponding to the second variation display, and the production control means is provided during the second game state. When at least part of the execution period of the first variable display and the execution period of the second variable display overlap, the first game effect and the second game effect can be respectively executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) A first determination means for determining the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on, and a first variation display (variation display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determination means. A second judgment that judges determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the variation display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting port) means, a second variable display executing means for executing a second variable display (normal symbol variable display, second special symbol variable display) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a first game effect (first variable effect) corresponding to the first variable display. , and a production control means capable of executing a second game production (ordinary figure fluctuation production, second fluctuation production) corresponding to the second variation display, and the state control means, in the second game state, The number of occurrences of the first game event (the total number of special symbol variations, the number of variations of the first special symbol, etc.) becomes the first number, or the number of occurrences of the second game event different from the first game event (normal symbol number of times of variation, number of times of variation of the second special symbol, number of small hits) reaches the second number of times, the second game state can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) First judgment means for judging the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired based on, and the first reservation storage (first Determination information (general figure determination information, special figure determination information) acquired based on the first storage means stored as storage storage) and establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal figure gate, entry to the second start opening) A second determination means for determining, a second storage means for storing determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition as a second reservation memory (general figure reservation memory, second reservation memory), and a first A game state (normal game state) and a state control means that can be controlled in a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a first game according to the determination result of the first determination means Production control means capable of executing production (first fluctuation production) and second game production (normal figure fluctuation production, second fluctuation production) according to the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the state The control means terminates the second game state when a predetermined end condition is established in the second game state (remaining number of time-saving special patterns, remaining number of normal-time patterns, and remaining number of time-saving small hits). can be controlled to the first game state, and the effect control means determines that the determination of the second determination means based on the second reservation memory stored during the second game state is during the second game state is executed, the second game effect can be executed, and the determination by the second determination means based on the second reservation memory stored during the second game state is after the end of the second game state Execution of the second game effect is restricted when it is executed during the first game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (entering the first start hole). A first determination means for determining the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on, and a first variation display (variation display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determination means. A second judgment that judges determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the variation display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting port) means, a second variable display executing means for executing a second variable display (normal symbol variable display, second special symbol variable display) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state; During the second variable display, the means performs a predetermined notice effect (jackpot notice effect: pre-reach notice effect, post-reach notice effect) that suggests the determination result of the second determination means corresponding to the second change display. It is executable, and when the second variable display is executed during the first game state, execution of the notice effect is restricted, and when the second variable display is executed during the second game state, The advance notice effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operable movable effect means (first movable member 73a, second movable Member 73b), the first determination means for determining determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the first starting port), and the determination of the first determination means Acquired based on the first variable display executing means for executing the first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result, and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, entry into the second starting port) Second determination means for determining the determination information (general figure determination information, special figure determination information), and second variation display based on the determination result of the second determination means (normal symbol variation display, second special symbol second variable display executing means for executing variable display); and state control means capable of controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state. and an effect control means capable of controlling an effect related to a game, wherein the effect control means controls an action effect (advance motion, decision motion) to operate the movable effect means in a predetermined manner during the second variable display. success motion, etc.) can be executed, and when the second variable display is executed during the first game state, the execution of the action effect is restricted, and the second variable display is executed during the second game state. When executed, the motion presentation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever, etc.) that can be operated by the player and a first determination means for determining determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the first starting port), and based on the determination result of the first determination means First variable display execution means for executing the first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol), and the determination acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, entry into the second starting port) Second determination means for determining information (ordinary figure determination information, special figure determination information), and second variation display based on the determination result of the second determination means (normal symbol variation display, second special symbol variation display) and a state control means capable of controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a game wherein the effect control means can execute a predetermined operation effect (announcement effect, final effect, etc.) for operating the operation means during the second variable display. When the second variable display is executed during the first game state, the execution of the operation effect is restricted, and when the second variable display is executed during the second game state, the operation It is possible to perform a production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (entering the first start hole). First determination means for determining the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on, and determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (general figure gate, entry into the second starting port) ( Normal figure determination information, special figure determination information), a first game state (normal game state), and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state. A possible state control means, and a production control means for executing a variation performance (first variation performance, normal figure variation performance, second variation performance) according to the determination result of the first determination means or the second determination means, wherein the effect control means provides a specific effect suggesting which of a first advantageous result and a second advantageous result differ in degree of advantage to the player during the variable effect that results in an advantage to the player. (Re-lottery effect) can be executed, and the first determination means determines that the result is an advantageous result (jackpot) during the first game state, and the second determination means during the second game state. is determined to be an advantageous result (hit, jackpot), the execution ratio of the specific effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (entering the first start hole) First judgment means for judging the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired based on, and the first reservation storage (first Determination information (general figure determination information, special figure determination information) acquired based on the first storage means stored as storage storage) and establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal figure gate, entry to the second start opening) A second determination means for determining the second storage means for storing determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition as a second reservation storage (ordinary drawing reservation storage, second reservation storage), and the second 2 variable display execution means for executing variable display (normal symbol variable display, second special symbol variable display) based on the determination result of the determination means, a first game state (normal game state), and the first game state A state control means capable of controlling a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the state control means, and an effect control means capable of controlling an effect related to the game, wherein the effect control means is stored in the second reservation memory It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead continuous announcement effect, etc.) for notifying the result of the corresponding variable display in advance, and when the variable display is executed during the first game state, the look-ahead effect is restricted, and when the variable display is executed during the second game state, the look-ahead effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (entering the first start hole) A first determination means for determining determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on, and a first variation display execution for executing a first variation display (first variation display) based on the determination result of the first determination means means, a second determination means for determining the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal figure gate, entry into the second start opening), and a second determination means based on the determination result of the second determination means Second variable display execution means for executing two variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols), a first game state (normal game state), and a second game state different from the first game state A state control means capable of controlling a game state (a time-saving game state) and an effect control means capable of controlling an effect related to a game are provided, and the first variable display execution means is capable of controlling a predetermined condition (RWM clear, When the number of times of the first variation display executed from the end of the big win game, the end of the small win game, the change of the game state, etc.) reaches a predetermined number of times, a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the first variation display and the second variable display executing means restricts switching of the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the second variable display during the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the winning of game media to the first start area (to the special 2 start port) The first determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the entry of the ball), and the winning of the game medium to the second start area (normal figure gate A second determination means for determining whether or not to execute an auxiliary game (hitting game) that controls the first start area to an open state based on the determination information acquired by entering the ball into), a normal game state, A state control means capable of controlling a specific game state (ordinary figure time reduction, general electric time reduction, special figure time reduction) different from the normal game state, and a production control means capable of controlling the production related to the game, In the specific game state, the first specific game state (for example, the first time-saving game state) and the second specific game state different from the first specific game state (for example, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state ), the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the probability that the second start area is controlled to the open state in a specific open pattern (long open pattern) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the winning of game media to the first start area (to the special 2 start port) is performed. The first determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the entry of the ball), and the winning of the game medium to the second start area (normal figure gate A second determination means for determining whether or not to execute an auxiliary game (hitting game) that controls the first start area to an open state based on the determination information acquired by entering the ball into), a normal game state, State control means capable of controlling a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and effect control means capable of controlling the effect related to the game, and the specific game state includes the special Including a first specific game state (for example, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state) through a game, and a second specific game state (a third time-saving game state) that does not go through the special game, In the 1 specific game state and the 2nd specific game state, the probability that the 2nd starting area is controlled to the open state with a specific open pattern (long open pattern) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problems is provided with main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means for controlling effects in response to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine capable of executing an advantageous special game (jackpot game), the main control means obtains determination information (special figure determination information ), first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (first variable display) based on the determination result of the first determination means, satisfaction of a second acquisition condition (normal map A second determination means for determining the determination information acquired based on the gate, the ball entering the second starting port), and a second variation display based on the determination result of the second determination means (normal symbol variation display, second A second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of special symbols), a first game state (normal game state), and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state. and a state control means, wherein the effect control means provides a first game effect (first variation effect) according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second game effect according to the determination result of the second determination means. It is possible to execute a game production (normal figure fluctuation production, second fluctuation production), and when the second fluctuation display is executed during the first game state, the main control means sends the production control means to the second Commands related to 2 fluctuation display (ordinary design designation command, general design fluctuation pattern designation command, special design designation command of the second special design, special design fluctuation pattern designation command of the second special design) are transmitted, but the second When the execution of the variable effect is restricted and the second variable display is executed during the second game state, a command related to the second variable display (normal symbol designation command, General figure fluctuation pattern specification command, special symbol specification command of the second special symbol, special figure variation pattern specification command of the second special symbol) are transmitted, and the second variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A 17th configuration for solving the above problems is provided with main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine capable of executing an advantageous special game (jackpot game), the main control means obtains determination information (special figure determination information ), first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (first variable display) based on the determination result of the first determination means, satisfaction of a second acquisition condition (normal map A second determination means for determining the determination information acquired based on the gate, the ball entering the second starting port), and a second variation display based on the determination result of the second determination means (normal symbol variation display, second A second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of special symbols), a first game state (normal game state), and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state. and a state control means, wherein when the first acquisition condition is satisfied and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, a first command (prefetching designation command) and a second command (holding number designation command) are executed. and the effect control means is capable of executing a first effect display (read-ahead effect) in response to the first command and a second effect display (holding display) in response to the second command. , when the first acquisition condition is satisfied during the first game state, the first effect display corresponding to the first command and the second effect display corresponding to the second command are executed; When the second acquisition condition is satisfied during one game state, the execution of the first effect display corresponding to the first command is restricted, but the second effect display corresponding to the second command is executed. be. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 18th configuration for solving the above problems is provided with main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means, In a gaming machine capable of executing an advantageous special game (jackpot game), the main control means obtains determination information (special figure determination information ), first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (first variable display) based on the determination result of the first determination means, satisfaction of a second acquisition condition (normal map A second determination means for determining the determination information acquired based on the gate, the ball entering the second starting port), and a second variation display based on the determination result of the second determination means (normal symbol variation display, second A second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of special symbols), a first game state (normal game state), and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state. and a state control means, wherein when the first acquisition condition is satisfied and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, a first command (prefetching designation command) and a second command (holding number designation command) are executed. and the effect control means is capable of executing a first effect display (read-ahead effect) in response to the first command and a second effect display (holding display) in response to the second command. , when the first acquisition condition is satisfied during the second game state, execution of the first effect display corresponding to the first command is restricted, but the second effect display corresponding to the second command is restricted. is executed, and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied during the second game state, the first effect display corresponding to the first command and the second effect display corresponding to the second command are executed. be. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (entering the first start hole) A first determination means for determining the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on, and a first variation display (variation display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determination means. A second judgment that judges determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the variation display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting port) means, a second variable display executing means for executing a second variable display (normal symbol variable display, second special symbol variable display) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a first game effect (first variable effect) corresponding to the first variable display. , and a production control means capable of executing a second game production (ordinary figure fluctuation production, second fluctuation production) corresponding to the second variation display, and the state control means, in the second game state, The first end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of remaining time-saving normal figures = 0, etc.), or the second end condition different from the first end condition (for example, the number of remaining time-saving special figures = 0, the remaining number of times per time-saving small = 0, etc.) is established, the second game state can be terminated, and the effect control means is configured such that the first end condition is established after starting the second game effect in the second game state. case, the second game effect is terminated in the first period, and when the second end condition is satisfied after the second game effect is started in the second game state, the second game effect is terminated in the first period. It is possible to end in a second period different from. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) A first determination means for determining the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on, and a first variation display (variation display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determination means. A second judgment that judges determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the variation display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting port) means, a second variable display executing means for executing a second variable display (normal symbol variable display, second special symbol variable display) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a first game effect (first variable effect) corresponding to the first variable display. , and a production control means capable of executing a second game production (ordinary figure fluctuation production, second fluctuation production) corresponding to the second variation display, and the state control means, in the second game state, The first end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of remaining time-saving normal figures = 0, etc.), or the second end condition different from the first end condition (for example, the number of remaining time-saving special figures = 0, the remaining number of times per time-saving small = 0 etc.) is established, the second game state can be terminated, and the effect control means displays a specific display ( result display) can be executed, and execution of the specific display (result display) is restricted when the second game state is terminated by the establishment of the second end condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the 21st configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, A determination means for determining determination information (general figure determination information, special figure determination information) acquired based on the ball), and a variation display based on the determination result of the determination means (normal symbol variation display, second special symbol variation display), a state control means capable of controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a game and a production control means capable of controlling the production related to the above, and the production control means controls production during customer waiting to appeal to the player (customer waiting demonstration production, display of guidance image for adjustment operation of volume and light amount, etc.) It is executable, and in the first gaming state, when the variable display (normal symbol variable display, second special symbol variable display) is being executed, the customer waiting effect can be executed, In the second game state, the execution of the waiting-for-customer effect is restricted when the variable display (normal symbol variable display, second special symbol variable display) is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, even if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the winning order of the game balls to the first start port 45 and the second start port 47 good.

Also, the game machine may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, the control related to the normal symbol of the present invention and the control related to the second special symbol may be exchanged. Specifically, in the normal game state, while executing a variable performance (game performance) for performing variable display of the second special symbol TZ2 without accompanied by variable display of the performance symbol 70a during the variable display of the second special symbol. , The holding icon corresponding to the second holding memory and the icon are not displayed, and in the time-saving gaming state, the variable performance ( A game presentation) may be executed, and a pending icon corresponding to the second pending memory and the icon may be displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed not to generate a probability variable gaming state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game, but depending on the type of the jackpot special symbol, the probability variable gaming state is not generated. In this case, in a specific round game (for example, the second round game or the final round game) during the jackpot game, the specific area 53 provided inside the first big winning hole 50 It is possible to perform processing for generating a probability variation gaming state on the condition that the game ball has passed, or based on the gaming state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, the variable display that becomes the probability variation gaming state. A process for determining the number of times may be performed.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and when winning symbols are stopped and displayed on an active line by a game using medals (game media) (giving conditions are satisfied), a predetermined amount is reached. It can also be used for a reel-type game machine (so-called slot machine) capable of awarding a player with a prize medal (prize medal data). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 game machine 5 game board 44 normal figure gate 45 first starting port 47 second starting port 50 first big winning port 56 second big winning port 70 first image display device 71 second image display device 110 main control board 110a main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
a first determination means for determining the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition;
a second determination means for determining the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition;
A state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state;
An effect control means capable of executing a first game effect according to the determination result of the first determination means and a second game effect according to the determination result of the second determination means,
The production control means is
When the second determination means determines that the first determination result is different from the losing result during the second game state, the first result suggestion effect is executed in the second game effect,
When the second determination means determines a second determination result different from the first determination result during the second game state, a second result different from the first result suggestive effect in the second game effect A game machine characterized by executing a suggestive performance.

Images